| 1 |
684 |
jeremybenn |
/* Analyze RTL for GNU compiler.
|
| 2 |
|
|
Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
|
| 3 |
|
|
1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010,
|
| 4 |
|
|
2011 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
| 5 |
|
|
|
| 6 |
|
|
This file is part of GCC.
|
| 7 |
|
|
|
| 8 |
|
|
GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
|
| 9 |
|
|
the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
|
| 10 |
|
|
Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
|
| 11 |
|
|
version.
|
| 12 |
|
|
|
| 13 |
|
|
GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
|
| 14 |
|
|
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
|
| 15 |
|
|
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
|
| 16 |
|
|
for more details.
|
| 17 |
|
|
|
| 18 |
|
|
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
| 19 |
|
|
along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
|
| 20 |
|
|
<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
|
| 21 |
|
|
|
| 22 |
|
|
|
| 23 |
|
|
#include "config.h"
|
| 24 |
|
|
#include "system.h"
|
| 25 |
|
|
#include "coretypes.h"
|
| 26 |
|
|
#include "tm.h"
|
| 27 |
|
|
#include "diagnostic-core.h"
|
| 28 |
|
|
#include "hard-reg-set.h"
|
| 29 |
|
|
#include "rtl.h"
|
| 30 |
|
|
#include "insn-config.h"
|
| 31 |
|
|
#include "recog.h"
|
| 32 |
|
|
#include "target.h"
|
| 33 |
|
|
#include "output.h"
|
| 34 |
|
|
#include "tm_p.h"
|
| 35 |
|
|
#include "flags.h"
|
| 36 |
|
|
#include "regs.h"
|
| 37 |
|
|
#include "function.h"
|
| 38 |
|
|
#include "df.h"
|
| 39 |
|
|
#include "tree.h"
|
| 40 |
|
|
#include "emit-rtl.h" /* FIXME: Can go away once crtl is moved to rtl.h. */
|
| 41 |
|
|
|
| 42 |
|
|
/* Forward declarations */
|
| 43 |
|
|
static void set_of_1 (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
|
| 44 |
|
|
static bool covers_regno_p (const_rtx, unsigned int);
|
| 45 |
|
|
static bool covers_regno_no_parallel_p (const_rtx, unsigned int);
|
| 46 |
|
|
static int rtx_referenced_p_1 (rtx *, void *);
|
| 47 |
|
|
static int computed_jump_p_1 (const_rtx);
|
| 48 |
|
|
static void parms_set (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
|
| 49 |
|
|
|
| 50 |
|
|
static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT cached_nonzero_bits (const_rtx, enum machine_mode,
|
| 51 |
|
|
const_rtx, enum machine_mode,
|
| 52 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);
|
| 53 |
|
|
static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero_bits1 (const_rtx, enum machine_mode,
|
| 54 |
|
|
const_rtx, enum machine_mode,
|
| 55 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);
|
| 56 |
|
|
static unsigned int cached_num_sign_bit_copies (const_rtx, enum machine_mode, const_rtx,
|
| 57 |
|
|
enum machine_mode,
|
| 58 |
|
|
unsigned int);
|
| 59 |
|
|
static unsigned int num_sign_bit_copies1 (const_rtx, enum machine_mode, const_rtx,
|
| 60 |
|
|
enum machine_mode, unsigned int);
|
| 61 |
|
|
|
| 62 |
|
|
/* Offset of the first 'e', 'E' or 'V' operand for each rtx code, or
|
| 63 |
|
|
-1 if a code has no such operand. */
|
| 64 |
|
|
static int non_rtx_starting_operands[NUM_RTX_CODE];
|
| 65 |
|
|
|
| 66 |
|
|
/* Truncation narrows the mode from SOURCE mode to DESTINATION mode.
|
| 67 |
|
|
If TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED (DESTINATION, DESTINATION_REP) is
|
| 68 |
|
|
SIGN_EXTEND then while narrowing we also have to enforce the
|
| 69 |
|
|
representation and sign-extend the value to mode DESTINATION_REP.
|
| 70 |
|
|
|
| 71 |
|
|
If the value is already sign-extended to DESTINATION_REP mode we
|
| 72 |
|
|
can just switch to DESTINATION mode on it. For each pair of
|
| 73 |
|
|
integral modes SOURCE and DESTINATION, when truncating from SOURCE
|
| 74 |
|
|
to DESTINATION, NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES_IN_REP[SOURCE][DESTINATION]
|
| 75 |
|
|
contains the number of high-order bits in SOURCE that have to be
|
| 76 |
|
|
copies of the sign-bit so that we can do this mode-switch to
|
| 77 |
|
|
DESTINATION. */
|
| 78 |
|
|
|
| 79 |
|
|
static unsigned int
|
| 80 |
|
|
num_sign_bit_copies_in_rep[MAX_MODE_INT + 1][MAX_MODE_INT + 1];
|
| 81 |
|
|
|
| 82 |
|
|
/* Return 1 if the value of X is unstable
|
| 83 |
|
|
(would be different at a different point in the program).
|
| 84 |
|
|
The frame pointer, arg pointer, etc. are considered stable
|
| 85 |
|
|
(within one function) and so is anything marked `unchanging'. */
|
| 86 |
|
|
|
| 87 |
|
|
int
|
| 88 |
|
|
rtx_unstable_p (const_rtx x)
|
| 89 |
|
|
{
|
| 90 |
|
|
const RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 91 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 92 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 93 |
|
|
|
| 94 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 95 |
|
|
{
|
| 96 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 97 |
|
|
return !MEM_READONLY_P (x) || rtx_unstable_p (XEXP (x, 0));
|
| 98 |
|
|
|
| 99 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 100 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 101 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 102 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 103 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 104 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 105 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 106 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 107 |
|
|
|
| 108 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 109 |
|
|
/* As in rtx_varies_p, we have to use the actual rtx, not reg number. */
|
| 110 |
|
|
if (x == frame_pointer_rtx || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
|
| 111 |
|
|
/* The arg pointer varies if it is not a fixed register. */
|
| 112 |
|
|
|| (x == arg_pointer_rtx && fixed_regs[ARG_POINTER_REGNUM]))
|
| 113 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 114 |
|
|
/* ??? When call-clobbered, the value is stable modulo the restore
|
| 115 |
|
|
that must happen after a call. This currently screws up local-alloc
|
| 116 |
|
|
into believing that the restore is not needed. */
|
| 117 |
|
|
if (!PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED && x == pic_offset_table_rtx)
|
| 118 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 119 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 120 |
|
|
|
| 121 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
| 122 |
|
|
if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
|
| 123 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 124 |
|
|
|
| 125 |
|
|
/* Fall through. */
|
| 126 |
|
|
|
| 127 |
|
|
default:
|
| 128 |
|
|
break;
|
| 129 |
|
|
}
|
| 130 |
|
|
|
| 131 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 132 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 133 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 134 |
|
|
{
|
| 135 |
|
|
if (rtx_unstable_p (XEXP (x, i)))
|
| 136 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 137 |
|
|
}
|
| 138 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 139 |
|
|
{
|
| 140 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 141 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
| 142 |
|
|
if (rtx_unstable_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j)))
|
| 143 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 144 |
|
|
}
|
| 145 |
|
|
|
| 146 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 147 |
|
|
}
|
| 148 |
|
|
|
| 149 |
|
|
/* Return 1 if X has a value that can vary even between two
|
| 150 |
|
|
executions of the program. 0 means X can be compared reliably
|
| 151 |
|
|
against certain constants or near-constants.
|
| 152 |
|
|
FOR_ALIAS is nonzero if we are called from alias analysis; if it is
|
| 153 |
|
|
zero, we are slightly more conservative.
|
| 154 |
|
|
The frame pointer and the arg pointer are considered constant. */
|
| 155 |
|
|
|
| 156 |
|
|
bool
|
| 157 |
|
|
rtx_varies_p (const_rtx x, bool for_alias)
|
| 158 |
|
|
{
|
| 159 |
|
|
RTX_CODE code;
|
| 160 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 161 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 162 |
|
|
|
| 163 |
|
|
if (!x)
|
| 164 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 165 |
|
|
|
| 166 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 167 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 168 |
|
|
{
|
| 169 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 170 |
|
|
return !MEM_READONLY_P (x) || rtx_varies_p (XEXP (x, 0), for_alias);
|
| 171 |
|
|
|
| 172 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 173 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 174 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 175 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 176 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 177 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 178 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 179 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 180 |
|
|
|
| 181 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 182 |
|
|
/* Note that we have to test for the actual rtx used for the frame
|
| 183 |
|
|
and arg pointers and not just the register number in case we have
|
| 184 |
|
|
eliminated the frame and/or arg pointer and are using it
|
| 185 |
|
|
for pseudos. */
|
| 186 |
|
|
if (x == frame_pointer_rtx || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
|
| 187 |
|
|
/* The arg pointer varies if it is not a fixed register. */
|
| 188 |
|
|
|| (x == arg_pointer_rtx && fixed_regs[ARG_POINTER_REGNUM]))
|
| 189 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 190 |
|
|
if (x == pic_offset_table_rtx
|
| 191 |
|
|
/* ??? When call-clobbered, the value is stable modulo the restore
|
| 192 |
|
|
that must happen after a call. This currently screws up
|
| 193 |
|
|
local-alloc into believing that the restore is not needed, so we
|
| 194 |
|
|
must return 0 only if we are called from alias analysis. */
|
| 195 |
|
|
&& (!PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED || for_alias))
|
| 196 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 197 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 198 |
|
|
|
| 199 |
|
|
case LO_SUM:
|
| 200 |
|
|
/* The operand 0 of a LO_SUM is considered constant
|
| 201 |
|
|
(in fact it is related specifically to operand 1)
|
| 202 |
|
|
during alias analysis. */
|
| 203 |
|
|
return (! for_alias && rtx_varies_p (XEXP (x, 0), for_alias))
|
| 204 |
|
|
|| rtx_varies_p (XEXP (x, 1), for_alias);
|
| 205 |
|
|
|
| 206 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
| 207 |
|
|
if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
|
| 208 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 209 |
|
|
|
| 210 |
|
|
/* Fall through. */
|
| 211 |
|
|
|
| 212 |
|
|
default:
|
| 213 |
|
|
break;
|
| 214 |
|
|
}
|
| 215 |
|
|
|
| 216 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 217 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 218 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 219 |
|
|
{
|
| 220 |
|
|
if (rtx_varies_p (XEXP (x, i), for_alias))
|
| 221 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 222 |
|
|
}
|
| 223 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 224 |
|
|
{
|
| 225 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 226 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
| 227 |
|
|
if (rtx_varies_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), for_alias))
|
| 228 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 229 |
|
|
}
|
| 230 |
|
|
|
| 231 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 232 |
|
|
}
|
| 233 |
|
|
|
| 234 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if the use of X as an address in a MEM can cause a trap.
|
| 235 |
|
|
MODE is the mode of the MEM (not that of X) and UNALIGNED_MEMS controls
|
| 236 |
|
|
whether nonzero is returned for unaligned memory accesses on strict
|
| 237 |
|
|
alignment machines. */
|
| 238 |
|
|
|
| 239 |
|
|
static int
|
| 240 |
|
|
rtx_addr_can_trap_p_1 (const_rtx x, HOST_WIDE_INT offset, HOST_WIDE_INT size,
|
| 241 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode, bool unaligned_mems)
|
| 242 |
|
|
{
|
| 243 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 244 |
|
|
|
| 245 |
|
|
if (STRICT_ALIGNMENT
|
| 246 |
|
|
&& unaligned_mems
|
| 247 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) != 0)
|
| 248 |
|
|
{
|
| 249 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT actual_offset = offset;
|
| 250 |
|
|
#ifdef SPARC_STACK_BOUNDARY_HACK
|
| 251 |
|
|
/* ??? The SPARC port may claim a STACK_BOUNDARY higher than
|
| 252 |
|
|
the real alignment of %sp. However, when it does this, the
|
| 253 |
|
|
alignment of %sp+STACK_POINTER_OFFSET is STACK_BOUNDARY. */
|
| 254 |
|
|
if (SPARC_STACK_BOUNDARY_HACK
|
| 255 |
|
|
&& (x == stack_pointer_rtx || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx))
|
| 256 |
|
|
actual_offset -= STACK_POINTER_OFFSET;
|
| 257 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 258 |
|
|
|
| 259 |
|
|
if (actual_offset % GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) != 0)
|
| 260 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 261 |
|
|
}
|
| 262 |
|
|
|
| 263 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 264 |
|
|
{
|
| 265 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 266 |
|
|
if (SYMBOL_REF_WEAK (x))
|
| 267 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 268 |
|
|
if (!CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (x))
|
| 269 |
|
|
{
|
| 270 |
|
|
tree decl;
|
| 271 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT decl_size;
|
| 272 |
|
|
|
| 273 |
|
|
if (offset < 0)
|
| 274 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 275 |
|
|
if (size == 0)
|
| 276 |
|
|
size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
|
| 277 |
|
|
if (size == 0)
|
| 278 |
|
|
return offset != 0;
|
| 279 |
|
|
|
| 280 |
|
|
/* If the size of the access or of the symbol is unknown,
|
| 281 |
|
|
assume the worst. */
|
| 282 |
|
|
decl = SYMBOL_REF_DECL (x);
|
| 283 |
|
|
|
| 284 |
|
|
/* Else check that the access is in bounds. TODO: restructure
|
| 285 |
|
|
expr_size/tree_expr_size/int_expr_size and just use the latter. */
|
| 286 |
|
|
if (!decl)
|
| 287 |
|
|
decl_size = -1;
|
| 288 |
|
|
else if (DECL_P (decl) && DECL_SIZE_UNIT (decl))
|
| 289 |
|
|
decl_size = (host_integerp (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (decl), 0)
|
| 290 |
|
|
? tree_low_cst (DECL_SIZE_UNIT (decl), 0)
|
| 291 |
|
|
: -1);
|
| 292 |
|
|
else if (TREE_CODE (decl) == STRING_CST)
|
| 293 |
|
|
decl_size = TREE_STRING_LENGTH (decl);
|
| 294 |
|
|
else if (TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
|
| 295 |
|
|
decl_size = int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (decl));
|
| 296 |
|
|
else
|
| 297 |
|
|
decl_size = -1;
|
| 298 |
|
|
|
| 299 |
|
|
return (decl_size <= 0 ? offset != 0 : offset + size > decl_size);
|
| 300 |
|
|
}
|
| 301 |
|
|
|
| 302 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 303 |
|
|
|
| 304 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 305 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 306 |
|
|
|
| 307 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 308 |
|
|
/* As in rtx_varies_p, we have to use the actual rtx, not reg number. */
|
| 309 |
|
|
if (x == frame_pointer_rtx || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
|
| 310 |
|
|
|| x == stack_pointer_rtx
|
| 311 |
|
|
/* The arg pointer varies if it is not a fixed register. */
|
| 312 |
|
|
|| (x == arg_pointer_rtx && fixed_regs[ARG_POINTER_REGNUM]))
|
| 313 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 314 |
|
|
/* All of the virtual frame registers are stack references. */
|
| 315 |
|
|
if (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
|
| 316 |
|
|
&& REGNO (x) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER)
|
| 317 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 318 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 319 |
|
|
|
| 320 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 321 |
|
|
return rtx_addr_can_trap_p_1 (XEXP (x, 0), offset, size,
|
| 322 |
|
|
mode, unaligned_mems);
|
| 323 |
|
|
|
| 324 |
|
|
case PLUS:
|
| 325 |
|
|
/* An address is assumed not to trap if:
|
| 326 |
|
|
- it is the pic register plus a constant. */
|
| 327 |
|
|
if (XEXP (x, 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
|
| 328 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 329 |
|
|
|
| 330 |
|
|
/* - or it is an address that can't trap plus a constant integer,
|
| 331 |
|
|
with the proper remainder modulo the mode size if we are
|
| 332 |
|
|
considering unaligned memory references. */
|
| 333 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 334 |
|
|
&& !rtx_addr_can_trap_p_1 (XEXP (x, 0), offset + INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)),
|
| 335 |
|
|
size, mode, unaligned_mems))
|
| 336 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 337 |
|
|
|
| 338 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 339 |
|
|
|
| 340 |
|
|
case LO_SUM:
|
| 341 |
|
|
case PRE_MODIFY:
|
| 342 |
|
|
return rtx_addr_can_trap_p_1 (XEXP (x, 1), offset, size,
|
| 343 |
|
|
mode, unaligned_mems);
|
| 344 |
|
|
|
| 345 |
|
|
case PRE_DEC:
|
| 346 |
|
|
case PRE_INC:
|
| 347 |
|
|
case POST_DEC:
|
| 348 |
|
|
case POST_INC:
|
| 349 |
|
|
case POST_MODIFY:
|
| 350 |
|
|
return rtx_addr_can_trap_p_1 (XEXP (x, 0), offset, size,
|
| 351 |
|
|
mode, unaligned_mems);
|
| 352 |
|
|
|
| 353 |
|
|
default:
|
| 354 |
|
|
break;
|
| 355 |
|
|
}
|
| 356 |
|
|
|
| 357 |
|
|
/* If it isn't one of the case above, it can cause a trap. */
|
| 358 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 359 |
|
|
}
|
| 360 |
|
|
|
| 361 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if the use of X as an address in a MEM can cause a trap. */
|
| 362 |
|
|
|
| 363 |
|
|
int
|
| 364 |
|
|
rtx_addr_can_trap_p (const_rtx x)
|
| 365 |
|
|
{
|
| 366 |
|
|
return rtx_addr_can_trap_p_1 (x, 0, 0, VOIDmode, false);
|
| 367 |
|
|
}
|
| 368 |
|
|
|
| 369 |
|
|
/* Return true if X is an address that is known to not be zero. */
|
| 370 |
|
|
|
| 371 |
|
|
bool
|
| 372 |
|
|
nonzero_address_p (const_rtx x)
|
| 373 |
|
|
{
|
| 374 |
|
|
const enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 375 |
|
|
|
| 376 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 377 |
|
|
{
|
| 378 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 379 |
|
|
return !SYMBOL_REF_WEAK (x);
|
| 380 |
|
|
|
| 381 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 382 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 383 |
|
|
|
| 384 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 385 |
|
|
/* As in rtx_varies_p, we have to use the actual rtx, not reg number. */
|
| 386 |
|
|
if (x == frame_pointer_rtx || x == hard_frame_pointer_rtx
|
| 387 |
|
|
|| x == stack_pointer_rtx
|
| 388 |
|
|
|| (x == arg_pointer_rtx && fixed_regs[ARG_POINTER_REGNUM]))
|
| 389 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 390 |
|
|
/* All of the virtual frame registers are stack references. */
|
| 391 |
|
|
if (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
|
| 392 |
|
|
&& REGNO (x) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER)
|
| 393 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 394 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 395 |
|
|
|
| 396 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 397 |
|
|
return nonzero_address_p (XEXP (x, 0));
|
| 398 |
|
|
|
| 399 |
|
|
case PLUS:
|
| 400 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
|
| 401 |
|
|
return nonzero_address_p (XEXP (x, 0));
|
| 402 |
|
|
/* Handle PIC references. */
|
| 403 |
|
|
else if (XEXP (x, 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx
|
| 404 |
|
|
&& CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
|
| 405 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 406 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 407 |
|
|
|
| 408 |
|
|
case PRE_MODIFY:
|
| 409 |
|
|
/* Similar to the above; allow positive offsets. Further, since
|
| 410 |
|
|
auto-inc is only allowed in memories, the register must be a
|
| 411 |
|
|
pointer. */
|
| 412 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 413 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) > 0)
|
| 414 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 415 |
|
|
return nonzero_address_p (XEXP (x, 0));
|
| 416 |
|
|
|
| 417 |
|
|
case PRE_INC:
|
| 418 |
|
|
/* Similarly. Further, the offset is always positive. */
|
| 419 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 420 |
|
|
|
| 421 |
|
|
case PRE_DEC:
|
| 422 |
|
|
case POST_DEC:
|
| 423 |
|
|
case POST_INC:
|
| 424 |
|
|
case POST_MODIFY:
|
| 425 |
|
|
return nonzero_address_p (XEXP (x, 0));
|
| 426 |
|
|
|
| 427 |
|
|
case LO_SUM:
|
| 428 |
|
|
return nonzero_address_p (XEXP (x, 1));
|
| 429 |
|
|
|
| 430 |
|
|
default:
|
| 431 |
|
|
break;
|
| 432 |
|
|
}
|
| 433 |
|
|
|
| 434 |
|
|
/* If it isn't one of the case above, might be zero. */
|
| 435 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 436 |
|
|
}
|
| 437 |
|
|
|
| 438 |
|
|
/* Return 1 if X refers to a memory location whose address
|
| 439 |
|
|
cannot be compared reliably with constant addresses,
|
| 440 |
|
|
or if X refers to a BLKmode memory object.
|
| 441 |
|
|
FOR_ALIAS is nonzero if we are called from alias analysis; if it is
|
| 442 |
|
|
zero, we are slightly more conservative. */
|
| 443 |
|
|
|
| 444 |
|
|
bool
|
| 445 |
|
|
rtx_addr_varies_p (const_rtx x, bool for_alias)
|
| 446 |
|
|
{
|
| 447 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
| 448 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 449 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 450 |
|
|
|
| 451 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
| 452 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 453 |
|
|
|
| 454 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 455 |
|
|
if (code == MEM)
|
| 456 |
|
|
return GET_MODE (x) == BLKmode || rtx_varies_p (XEXP (x, 0), for_alias);
|
| 457 |
|
|
|
| 458 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 459 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 460 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 461 |
|
|
{
|
| 462 |
|
|
if (rtx_addr_varies_p (XEXP (x, i), for_alias))
|
| 463 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 464 |
|
|
}
|
| 465 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 466 |
|
|
{
|
| 467 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 468 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
| 469 |
|
|
if (rtx_addr_varies_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), for_alias))
|
| 470 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 471 |
|
|
}
|
| 472 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 473 |
|
|
}
|
| 474 |
|
|
|
| 475 |
|
|
/* Return the value of the integer term in X, if one is apparent;
|
| 476 |
|
|
otherwise return 0.
|
| 477 |
|
|
Only obvious integer terms are detected.
|
| 478 |
|
|
This is used in cse.c with the `related_value' field. */
|
| 479 |
|
|
|
| 480 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT
|
| 481 |
|
|
get_integer_term (const_rtx x)
|
| 482 |
|
|
{
|
| 483 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
|
| 484 |
|
|
x = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 485 |
|
|
|
| 486 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == MINUS
|
| 487 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
|
| 488 |
|
|
return - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
|
| 489 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS
|
| 490 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
|
| 491 |
|
|
return INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
|
| 492 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 493 |
|
|
}
|
| 494 |
|
|
|
| 495 |
|
|
/* If X is a constant, return the value sans apparent integer term;
|
| 496 |
|
|
otherwise return 0.
|
| 497 |
|
|
Only obvious integer terms are detected. */
|
| 498 |
|
|
|
| 499 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 500 |
|
|
get_related_value (const_rtx x)
|
| 501 |
|
|
{
|
| 502 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) != CONST)
|
| 503 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 504 |
|
|
x = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 505 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS
|
| 506 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
|
| 507 |
|
|
return XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 508 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (x) == MINUS
|
| 509 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
|
| 510 |
|
|
return XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 511 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 512 |
|
|
}
|
| 513 |
|
|
|
| 514 |
|
|
/* Return true if SYMBOL is a SYMBOL_REF and OFFSET + SYMBOL points
|
| 515 |
|
|
to somewhere in the same object or object_block as SYMBOL. */
|
| 516 |
|
|
|
| 517 |
|
|
bool
|
| 518 |
|
|
offset_within_block_p (const_rtx symbol, HOST_WIDE_INT offset)
|
| 519 |
|
|
{
|
| 520 |
|
|
tree decl;
|
| 521 |
|
|
|
| 522 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (symbol) != SYMBOL_REF)
|
| 523 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 524 |
|
|
|
| 525 |
|
|
if (offset == 0)
|
| 526 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 527 |
|
|
|
| 528 |
|
|
if (offset > 0)
|
| 529 |
|
|
{
|
| 530 |
|
|
if (CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (symbol)
|
| 531 |
|
|
&& offset < (int) GET_MODE_SIZE (get_pool_mode (symbol)))
|
| 532 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 533 |
|
|
|
| 534 |
|
|
decl = SYMBOL_REF_DECL (symbol);
|
| 535 |
|
|
if (decl && offset < int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
|
| 536 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 537 |
|
|
}
|
| 538 |
|
|
|
| 539 |
|
|
if (SYMBOL_REF_HAS_BLOCK_INFO_P (symbol)
|
| 540 |
|
|
&& SYMBOL_REF_BLOCK (symbol)
|
| 541 |
|
|
&& SYMBOL_REF_BLOCK_OFFSET (symbol) >= 0
|
| 542 |
|
|
&& ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) offset + SYMBOL_REF_BLOCK_OFFSET (symbol)
|
| 543 |
|
|
< (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) SYMBOL_REF_BLOCK (symbol)->size))
|
| 544 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 545 |
|
|
|
| 546 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 547 |
|
|
}
|
| 548 |
|
|
|
| 549 |
|
|
/* Split X into a base and a constant offset, storing them in *BASE_OUT
|
| 550 |
|
|
and *OFFSET_OUT respectively. */
|
| 551 |
|
|
|
| 552 |
|
|
void
|
| 553 |
|
|
split_const (rtx x, rtx *base_out, rtx *offset_out)
|
| 554 |
|
|
{
|
| 555 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
|
| 556 |
|
|
{
|
| 557 |
|
|
x = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 558 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
|
| 559 |
|
|
{
|
| 560 |
|
|
*base_out = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 561 |
|
|
*offset_out = XEXP (x, 1);
|
| 562 |
|
|
return;
|
| 563 |
|
|
}
|
| 564 |
|
|
}
|
| 565 |
|
|
*base_out = x;
|
| 566 |
|
|
*offset_out = const0_rtx;
|
| 567 |
|
|
}
|
| 568 |
|
|
|
| 569 |
|
|
/* Return the number of places FIND appears within X. If COUNT_DEST is
|
| 570 |
|
|
zero, we do not count occurrences inside the destination of a SET. */
|
| 571 |
|
|
|
| 572 |
|
|
int
|
| 573 |
|
|
count_occurrences (const_rtx x, const_rtx find, int count_dest)
|
| 574 |
|
|
{
|
| 575 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
| 576 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
| 577 |
|
|
const char *format_ptr;
|
| 578 |
|
|
int count;
|
| 579 |
|
|
|
| 580 |
|
|
if (x == find)
|
| 581 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 582 |
|
|
|
| 583 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 584 |
|
|
|
| 585 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 586 |
|
|
{
|
| 587 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 588 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 589 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 590 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 591 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 592 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 593 |
|
|
case CODE_LABEL:
|
| 594 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 595 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
| 596 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 597 |
|
|
|
| 598 |
|
|
case EXPR_LIST:
|
| 599 |
|
|
count = count_occurrences (XEXP (x, 0), find, count_dest);
|
| 600 |
|
|
if (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 601 |
|
|
count += count_occurrences (XEXP (x, 1), find, count_dest);
|
| 602 |
|
|
return count;
|
| 603 |
|
|
|
| 604 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 605 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (find) && rtx_equal_p (x, find))
|
| 606 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 607 |
|
|
break;
|
| 608 |
|
|
|
| 609 |
|
|
case SET:
|
| 610 |
|
|
if (SET_DEST (x) == find && ! count_dest)
|
| 611 |
|
|
return count_occurrences (SET_SRC (x), find, count_dest);
|
| 612 |
|
|
break;
|
| 613 |
|
|
|
| 614 |
|
|
default:
|
| 615 |
|
|
break;
|
| 616 |
|
|
}
|
| 617 |
|
|
|
| 618 |
|
|
format_ptr = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 619 |
|
|
count = 0;
|
| 620 |
|
|
|
| 621 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
|
| 622 |
|
|
{
|
| 623 |
|
|
switch (*format_ptr++)
|
| 624 |
|
|
{
|
| 625 |
|
|
case 'e':
|
| 626 |
|
|
count += count_occurrences (XEXP (x, i), find, count_dest);
|
| 627 |
|
|
break;
|
| 628 |
|
|
|
| 629 |
|
|
case 'E':
|
| 630 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
| 631 |
|
|
count += count_occurrences (XVECEXP (x, i, j), find, count_dest);
|
| 632 |
|
|
break;
|
| 633 |
|
|
}
|
| 634 |
|
|
}
|
| 635 |
|
|
return count;
|
| 636 |
|
|
}
|
| 637 |
|
|
|
| 638 |
|
|
|
| 639 |
|
|
/* Nonzero if register REG appears somewhere within IN.
|
| 640 |
|
|
Also works if REG is not a register; in this case it checks
|
| 641 |
|
|
for a subexpression of IN that is Lisp "equal" to REG. */
|
| 642 |
|
|
|
| 643 |
|
|
int
|
| 644 |
|
|
reg_mentioned_p (const_rtx reg, const_rtx in)
|
| 645 |
|
|
{
|
| 646 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 647 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 648 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
| 649 |
|
|
|
| 650 |
|
|
if (in == 0)
|
| 651 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 652 |
|
|
|
| 653 |
|
|
if (reg == in)
|
| 654 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 655 |
|
|
|
| 656 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (in) == LABEL_REF)
|
| 657 |
|
|
return reg == XEXP (in, 0);
|
| 658 |
|
|
|
| 659 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (in);
|
| 660 |
|
|
|
| 661 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 662 |
|
|
{
|
| 663 |
|
|
/* Compare registers by number. */
|
| 664 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 665 |
|
|
return REG_P (reg) && REGNO (in) == REGNO (reg);
|
| 666 |
|
|
|
| 667 |
|
|
/* These codes have no constituent expressions
|
| 668 |
|
|
and are unique. */
|
| 669 |
|
|
case SCRATCH:
|
| 670 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
| 671 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 672 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 673 |
|
|
|
| 674 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 675 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 676 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 677 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 678 |
|
|
/* These are kept unique for a given value. */
|
| 679 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 680 |
|
|
|
| 681 |
|
|
default:
|
| 682 |
|
|
break;
|
| 683 |
|
|
}
|
| 684 |
|
|
|
| 685 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (reg) == code && rtx_equal_p (reg, in))
|
| 686 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 687 |
|
|
|
| 688 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 689 |
|
|
|
| 690 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 691 |
|
|
{
|
| 692 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 693 |
|
|
{
|
| 694 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 695 |
|
|
for (j = XVECLEN (in, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
|
| 696 |
|
|
if (reg_mentioned_p (reg, XVECEXP (in, i, j)))
|
| 697 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 698 |
|
|
}
|
| 699 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'e'
|
| 700 |
|
|
&& reg_mentioned_p (reg, XEXP (in, i)))
|
| 701 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 702 |
|
|
}
|
| 703 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 704 |
|
|
}
|
| 705 |
|
|
|
| 706 |
|
|
/* Return 1 if in between BEG and END, exclusive of BEG and END, there is
|
| 707 |
|
|
no CODE_LABEL insn. */
|
| 708 |
|
|
|
| 709 |
|
|
int
|
| 710 |
|
|
no_labels_between_p (const_rtx beg, const_rtx end)
|
| 711 |
|
|
{
|
| 712 |
|
|
rtx p;
|
| 713 |
|
|
if (beg == end)
|
| 714 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 715 |
|
|
for (p = NEXT_INSN (beg); p != end; p = NEXT_INSN (p))
|
| 716 |
|
|
if (LABEL_P (p))
|
| 717 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 718 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 719 |
|
|
}
|
| 720 |
|
|
|
| 721 |
|
|
/* Nonzero if register REG is used in an insn between
|
| 722 |
|
|
FROM_INSN and TO_INSN (exclusive of those two). */
|
| 723 |
|
|
|
| 724 |
|
|
int
|
| 725 |
|
|
reg_used_between_p (const_rtx reg, const_rtx from_insn, const_rtx to_insn)
|
| 726 |
|
|
{
|
| 727 |
|
|
rtx insn;
|
| 728 |
|
|
|
| 729 |
|
|
if (from_insn == to_insn)
|
| 730 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 731 |
|
|
|
| 732 |
|
|
for (insn = NEXT_INSN (from_insn); insn != to_insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
|
| 733 |
|
|
if (NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn)
|
| 734 |
|
|
&& (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, PATTERN (insn))
|
| 735 |
|
|
|| (CALL_P (insn) && find_reg_fusage (insn, USE, reg))))
|
| 736 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 737 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 738 |
|
|
}
|
| 739 |
|
|
|
| 740 |
|
|
/* Nonzero if the old value of X, a register, is referenced in BODY. If X
|
| 741 |
|
|
is entirely replaced by a new value and the only use is as a SET_DEST,
|
| 742 |
|
|
we do not consider it a reference. */
|
| 743 |
|
|
|
| 744 |
|
|
int
|
| 745 |
|
|
reg_referenced_p (const_rtx x, const_rtx body)
|
| 746 |
|
|
{
|
| 747 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 748 |
|
|
|
| 749 |
|
|
switch (GET_CODE (body))
|
| 750 |
|
|
{
|
| 751 |
|
|
case SET:
|
| 752 |
|
|
if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, SET_SRC (body)))
|
| 753 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 754 |
|
|
|
| 755 |
|
|
/* If the destination is anything other than CC0, PC, a REG or a SUBREG
|
| 756 |
|
|
of a REG that occupies all of the REG, the insn references X if
|
| 757 |
|
|
it is mentioned in the destination. */
|
| 758 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (body)) != CC0
|
| 759 |
|
|
&& GET_CODE (SET_DEST (body)) != PC
|
| 760 |
|
|
&& !REG_P (SET_DEST (body))
|
| 761 |
|
|
&& ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (body)) == SUBREG
|
| 762 |
|
|
&& REG_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (body)))
|
| 763 |
|
|
&& (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (body))))
|
| 764 |
|
|
+ (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
|
| 765 |
|
|
== ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (body)))
|
| 766 |
|
|
+ (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)))
|
| 767 |
|
|
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, SET_DEST (body)))
|
| 768 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 769 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 770 |
|
|
|
| 771 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
| 772 |
|
|
for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (body) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 773 |
|
|
if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (body, i)))
|
| 774 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 775 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 776 |
|
|
|
| 777 |
|
|
case CALL:
|
| 778 |
|
|
case USE:
|
| 779 |
|
|
case IF_THEN_ELSE:
|
| 780 |
|
|
return reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, body);
|
| 781 |
|
|
|
| 782 |
|
|
case TRAP_IF:
|
| 783 |
|
|
return reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, TRAP_CONDITION (body));
|
| 784 |
|
|
|
| 785 |
|
|
case PREFETCH:
|
| 786 |
|
|
return reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, XEXP (body, 0));
|
| 787 |
|
|
|
| 788 |
|
|
case UNSPEC:
|
| 789 |
|
|
case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
|
| 790 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (body, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 791 |
|
|
if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, XVECEXP (body, 0, i)))
|
| 792 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 793 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 794 |
|
|
|
| 795 |
|
|
case PARALLEL:
|
| 796 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (body, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 797 |
|
|
if (reg_referenced_p (x, XVECEXP (body, 0, i)))
|
| 798 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 799 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 800 |
|
|
|
| 801 |
|
|
case CLOBBER:
|
| 802 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (XEXP (body, 0)))
|
| 803 |
|
|
if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, XEXP (XEXP (body, 0), 0)))
|
| 804 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 805 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 806 |
|
|
|
| 807 |
|
|
case COND_EXEC:
|
| 808 |
|
|
if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, COND_EXEC_TEST (body)))
|
| 809 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 810 |
|
|
return reg_referenced_p (x, COND_EXEC_CODE (body));
|
| 811 |
|
|
|
| 812 |
|
|
default:
|
| 813 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 814 |
|
|
}
|
| 815 |
|
|
}
|
| 816 |
|
|
|
| 817 |
|
|
/* Nonzero if register REG is set or clobbered in an insn between
|
| 818 |
|
|
FROM_INSN and TO_INSN (exclusive of those two). */
|
| 819 |
|
|
|
| 820 |
|
|
int
|
| 821 |
|
|
reg_set_between_p (const_rtx reg, const_rtx from_insn, const_rtx to_insn)
|
| 822 |
|
|
{
|
| 823 |
|
|
const_rtx insn;
|
| 824 |
|
|
|
| 825 |
|
|
if (from_insn == to_insn)
|
| 826 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 827 |
|
|
|
| 828 |
|
|
for (insn = NEXT_INSN (from_insn); insn != to_insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
|
| 829 |
|
|
if (INSN_P (insn) && reg_set_p (reg, insn))
|
| 830 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 831 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 832 |
|
|
}
|
| 833 |
|
|
|
| 834 |
|
|
/* Internals of reg_set_between_p. */
|
| 835 |
|
|
int
|
| 836 |
|
|
reg_set_p (const_rtx reg, const_rtx insn)
|
| 837 |
|
|
{
|
| 838 |
|
|
/* We can be passed an insn or part of one. If we are passed an insn,
|
| 839 |
|
|
check if a side-effect of the insn clobbers REG. */
|
| 840 |
|
|
if (INSN_P (insn)
|
| 841 |
|
|
&& (FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (insn, reg)
|
| 842 |
|
|
|| (CALL_P (insn)
|
| 843 |
|
|
&& ((REG_P (reg)
|
| 844 |
|
|
&& REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
| 845 |
|
|
&& overlaps_hard_reg_set_p (regs_invalidated_by_call,
|
| 846 |
|
|
GET_MODE (reg), REGNO (reg)))
|
| 847 |
|
|
|| MEM_P (reg)
|
| 848 |
|
|
|| find_reg_fusage (insn, CLOBBER, reg)))))
|
| 849 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 850 |
|
|
|
| 851 |
|
|
return set_of (reg, insn) != NULL_RTX;
|
| 852 |
|
|
}
|
| 853 |
|
|
|
| 854 |
|
|
/* Similar to reg_set_between_p, but check all registers in X. Return 0
|
| 855 |
|
|
only if none of them are modified between START and END. Return 1 if
|
| 856 |
|
|
X contains a MEM; this routine does use memory aliasing. */
|
| 857 |
|
|
|
| 858 |
|
|
int
|
| 859 |
|
|
modified_between_p (const_rtx x, const_rtx start, const_rtx end)
|
| 860 |
|
|
{
|
| 861 |
|
|
const enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 862 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 863 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
| 864 |
|
|
rtx insn;
|
| 865 |
|
|
|
| 866 |
|
|
if (start == end)
|
| 867 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 868 |
|
|
|
| 869 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 870 |
|
|
{
|
| 871 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 872 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 873 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 874 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 875 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 876 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 877 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 878 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 879 |
|
|
|
| 880 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 881 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
| 882 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 883 |
|
|
|
| 884 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 885 |
|
|
if (modified_between_p (XEXP (x, 0), start, end))
|
| 886 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 887 |
|
|
if (MEM_READONLY_P (x))
|
| 888 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 889 |
|
|
for (insn = NEXT_INSN (start); insn != end; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
|
| 890 |
|
|
if (memory_modified_in_insn_p (x, insn))
|
| 891 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 892 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 893 |
|
|
break;
|
| 894 |
|
|
|
| 895 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 896 |
|
|
return reg_set_between_p (x, start, end);
|
| 897 |
|
|
|
| 898 |
|
|
default:
|
| 899 |
|
|
break;
|
| 900 |
|
|
}
|
| 901 |
|
|
|
| 902 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 903 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 904 |
|
|
{
|
| 905 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e' && modified_between_p (XEXP (x, i), start, end))
|
| 906 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 907 |
|
|
|
| 908 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 909 |
|
|
for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
|
| 910 |
|
|
if (modified_between_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), start, end))
|
| 911 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 912 |
|
|
}
|
| 913 |
|
|
|
| 914 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 915 |
|
|
}
|
| 916 |
|
|
|
| 917 |
|
|
/* Similar to reg_set_p, but check all registers in X. Return 0 only if none
|
| 918 |
|
|
of them are modified in INSN. Return 1 if X contains a MEM; this routine
|
| 919 |
|
|
does use memory aliasing. */
|
| 920 |
|
|
|
| 921 |
|
|
int
|
| 922 |
|
|
modified_in_p (const_rtx x, const_rtx insn)
|
| 923 |
|
|
{
|
| 924 |
|
|
const enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 925 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 926 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
| 927 |
|
|
|
| 928 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 929 |
|
|
{
|
| 930 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 931 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 932 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 933 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 934 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 935 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 936 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 937 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 938 |
|
|
|
| 939 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 940 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
| 941 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 942 |
|
|
|
| 943 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 944 |
|
|
if (modified_in_p (XEXP (x, 0), insn))
|
| 945 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 946 |
|
|
if (MEM_READONLY_P (x))
|
| 947 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 948 |
|
|
if (memory_modified_in_insn_p (x, insn))
|
| 949 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 950 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 951 |
|
|
break;
|
| 952 |
|
|
|
| 953 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 954 |
|
|
return reg_set_p (x, insn);
|
| 955 |
|
|
|
| 956 |
|
|
default:
|
| 957 |
|
|
break;
|
| 958 |
|
|
}
|
| 959 |
|
|
|
| 960 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 961 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 962 |
|
|
{
|
| 963 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e' && modified_in_p (XEXP (x, i), insn))
|
| 964 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 965 |
|
|
|
| 966 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 967 |
|
|
for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
|
| 968 |
|
|
if (modified_in_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn))
|
| 969 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 970 |
|
|
}
|
| 971 |
|
|
|
| 972 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 973 |
|
|
}
|
| 974 |
|
|
|
| 975 |
|
|
/* Helper function for set_of. */
|
| 976 |
|
|
struct set_of_data
|
| 977 |
|
|
{
|
| 978 |
|
|
const_rtx found;
|
| 979 |
|
|
const_rtx pat;
|
| 980 |
|
|
};
|
| 981 |
|
|
|
| 982 |
|
|
static void
|
| 983 |
|
|
set_of_1 (rtx x, const_rtx pat, void *data1)
|
| 984 |
|
|
{
|
| 985 |
|
|
struct set_of_data *const data = (struct set_of_data *) (data1);
|
| 986 |
|
|
if (rtx_equal_p (x, data->pat)
|
| 987 |
|
|
|| (!MEM_P (x) && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (data->pat, x)))
|
| 988 |
|
|
data->found = pat;
|
| 989 |
|
|
}
|
| 990 |
|
|
|
| 991 |
|
|
/* Give an INSN, return a SET or CLOBBER expression that does modify PAT
|
| 992 |
|
|
(either directly or via STRICT_LOW_PART and similar modifiers). */
|
| 993 |
|
|
const_rtx
|
| 994 |
|
|
set_of (const_rtx pat, const_rtx insn)
|
| 995 |
|
|
{
|
| 996 |
|
|
struct set_of_data data;
|
| 997 |
|
|
data.found = NULL_RTX;
|
| 998 |
|
|
data.pat = pat;
|
| 999 |
|
|
note_stores (INSN_P (insn) ? PATTERN (insn) : insn, set_of_1, &data);
|
| 1000 |
|
|
return data.found;
|
| 1001 |
|
|
}
|
| 1002 |
|
|
|
| 1003 |
|
|
/* This function, called through note_stores, collects sets and
|
| 1004 |
|
|
clobbers of hard registers in a HARD_REG_SET, which is pointed to
|
| 1005 |
|
|
by DATA. */
|
| 1006 |
|
|
void
|
| 1007 |
|
|
record_hard_reg_sets (rtx x, const_rtx pat ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, void *data)
|
| 1008 |
|
|
{
|
| 1009 |
|
|
HARD_REG_SET *pset = (HARD_REG_SET *)data;
|
| 1010 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x) && HARD_REGISTER_P (x))
|
| 1011 |
|
|
add_to_hard_reg_set (pset, GET_MODE (x), REGNO (x));
|
| 1012 |
|
|
}
|
| 1013 |
|
|
|
| 1014 |
|
|
/* Examine INSN, and compute the set of hard registers written by it.
|
| 1015 |
|
|
Store it in *PSET. Should only be called after reload. */
|
| 1016 |
|
|
void
|
| 1017 |
|
|
find_all_hard_reg_sets (const_rtx insn, HARD_REG_SET *pset)
|
| 1018 |
|
|
{
|
| 1019 |
|
|
rtx link;
|
| 1020 |
|
|
|
| 1021 |
|
|
CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (*pset);
|
| 1022 |
|
|
note_stores (PATTERN (insn), record_hard_reg_sets, pset);
|
| 1023 |
|
|
if (CALL_P (insn))
|
| 1024 |
|
|
IOR_HARD_REG_SET (*pset, call_used_reg_set);
|
| 1025 |
|
|
for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
|
| 1026 |
|
|
if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC)
|
| 1027 |
|
|
record_hard_reg_sets (XEXP (link, 0), NULL, pset);
|
| 1028 |
|
|
}
|
| 1029 |
|
|
|
| 1030 |
|
|
/* A for_each_rtx subroutine of record_hard_reg_uses. */
|
| 1031 |
|
|
static int
|
| 1032 |
|
|
record_hard_reg_uses_1 (rtx *px, void *data)
|
| 1033 |
|
|
{
|
| 1034 |
|
|
rtx x = *px;
|
| 1035 |
|
|
HARD_REG_SET *pused = (HARD_REG_SET *)data;
|
| 1036 |
|
|
|
| 1037 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
| 1038 |
|
|
{
|
| 1039 |
|
|
int nregs = hard_regno_nregs[REGNO (x)][GET_MODE (x)];
|
| 1040 |
|
|
while (nregs-- > 0)
|
| 1041 |
|
|
SET_HARD_REG_BIT (*pused, REGNO (x) + nregs);
|
| 1042 |
|
|
}
|
| 1043 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1044 |
|
|
}
|
| 1045 |
|
|
|
| 1046 |
|
|
/* Like record_hard_reg_sets, but called through note_uses. */
|
| 1047 |
|
|
void
|
| 1048 |
|
|
record_hard_reg_uses (rtx *px, void *data)
|
| 1049 |
|
|
{
|
| 1050 |
|
|
for_each_rtx (px, record_hard_reg_uses_1, data);
|
| 1051 |
|
|
}
|
| 1052 |
|
|
|
| 1053 |
|
|
/* Given an INSN, return a SET expression if this insn has only a single SET.
|
| 1054 |
|
|
It may also have CLOBBERs, USEs, or SET whose output
|
| 1055 |
|
|
will not be used, which we ignore. */
|
| 1056 |
|
|
|
| 1057 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 1058 |
|
|
single_set_2 (const_rtx insn, const_rtx pat)
|
| 1059 |
|
|
{
|
| 1060 |
|
|
rtx set = NULL;
|
| 1061 |
|
|
int set_verified = 1;
|
| 1062 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 1063 |
|
|
|
| 1064 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
|
| 1065 |
|
|
{
|
| 1066 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
|
| 1067 |
|
|
{
|
| 1068 |
|
|
rtx sub = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
|
| 1069 |
|
|
switch (GET_CODE (sub))
|
| 1070 |
|
|
{
|
| 1071 |
|
|
case USE:
|
| 1072 |
|
|
case CLOBBER:
|
| 1073 |
|
|
break;
|
| 1074 |
|
|
|
| 1075 |
|
|
case SET:
|
| 1076 |
|
|
/* We can consider insns having multiple sets, where all
|
| 1077 |
|
|
but one are dead as single set insns. In common case
|
| 1078 |
|
|
only single set is present in the pattern so we want
|
| 1079 |
|
|
to avoid checking for REG_UNUSED notes unless necessary.
|
| 1080 |
|
|
|
| 1081 |
|
|
When we reach set first time, we just expect this is
|
| 1082 |
|
|
the single set we are looking for and only when more
|
| 1083 |
|
|
sets are found in the insn, we check them. */
|
| 1084 |
|
|
if (!set_verified)
|
| 1085 |
|
|
{
|
| 1086 |
|
|
if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (set))
|
| 1087 |
|
|
&& !side_effects_p (set))
|
| 1088 |
|
|
set = NULL;
|
| 1089 |
|
|
else
|
| 1090 |
|
|
set_verified = 1;
|
| 1091 |
|
|
}
|
| 1092 |
|
|
if (!set)
|
| 1093 |
|
|
set = sub, set_verified = 0;
|
| 1094 |
|
|
else if (!find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (sub))
|
| 1095 |
|
|
|| side_effects_p (sub))
|
| 1096 |
|
|
return NULL_RTX;
|
| 1097 |
|
|
break;
|
| 1098 |
|
|
|
| 1099 |
|
|
default:
|
| 1100 |
|
|
return NULL_RTX;
|
| 1101 |
|
|
}
|
| 1102 |
|
|
}
|
| 1103 |
|
|
}
|
| 1104 |
|
|
return set;
|
| 1105 |
|
|
}
|
| 1106 |
|
|
|
| 1107 |
|
|
/* Given an INSN, return nonzero if it has more than one SET, else return
|
| 1108 |
|
|
zero. */
|
| 1109 |
|
|
|
| 1110 |
|
|
int
|
| 1111 |
|
|
multiple_sets (const_rtx insn)
|
| 1112 |
|
|
{
|
| 1113 |
|
|
int found;
|
| 1114 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 1115 |
|
|
|
| 1116 |
|
|
/* INSN must be an insn. */
|
| 1117 |
|
|
if (! INSN_P (insn))
|
| 1118 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1119 |
|
|
|
| 1120 |
|
|
/* Only a PARALLEL can have multiple SETs. */
|
| 1121 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
|
| 1122 |
|
|
{
|
| 1123 |
|
|
for (i = 0, found = 0; i < XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0); i++)
|
| 1124 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == SET)
|
| 1125 |
|
|
{
|
| 1126 |
|
|
/* If we have already found a SET, then return now. */
|
| 1127 |
|
|
if (found)
|
| 1128 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1129 |
|
|
else
|
| 1130 |
|
|
found = 1;
|
| 1131 |
|
|
}
|
| 1132 |
|
|
}
|
| 1133 |
|
|
|
| 1134 |
|
|
/* Either zero or one SET. */
|
| 1135 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1136 |
|
|
}
|
| 1137 |
|
|
|
| 1138 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if the destination of SET equals the source
|
| 1139 |
|
|
and there are no side effects. */
|
| 1140 |
|
|
|
| 1141 |
|
|
int
|
| 1142 |
|
|
set_noop_p (const_rtx set)
|
| 1143 |
|
|
{
|
| 1144 |
|
|
rtx src = SET_SRC (set);
|
| 1145 |
|
|
rtx dst = SET_DEST (set);
|
| 1146 |
|
|
|
| 1147 |
|
|
if (dst == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
|
| 1148 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1149 |
|
|
|
| 1150 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (dst) && MEM_P (src))
|
| 1151 |
|
|
return rtx_equal_p (dst, src) && !side_effects_p (dst);
|
| 1152 |
|
|
|
| 1153 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dst) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
|
| 1154 |
|
|
return rtx_equal_p (XEXP (dst, 0), src)
|
| 1155 |
|
|
&& ! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && XEXP (dst, 2) == const0_rtx
|
| 1156 |
|
|
&& !side_effects_p (src);
|
| 1157 |
|
|
|
| 1158 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dst) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
|
| 1159 |
|
|
dst = XEXP (dst, 0);
|
| 1160 |
|
|
|
| 1161 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (dst) == SUBREG)
|
| 1162 |
|
|
{
|
| 1163 |
|
|
if (SUBREG_BYTE (src) != SUBREG_BYTE (dst))
|
| 1164 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1165 |
|
|
src = SUBREG_REG (src);
|
| 1166 |
|
|
dst = SUBREG_REG (dst);
|
| 1167 |
|
|
}
|
| 1168 |
|
|
|
| 1169 |
|
|
return (REG_P (src) && REG_P (dst)
|
| 1170 |
|
|
&& REGNO (src) == REGNO (dst));
|
| 1171 |
|
|
}
|
| 1172 |
|
|
|
| 1173 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if an insn consists only of SETs, each of which only sets a
|
| 1174 |
|
|
value to itself. */
|
| 1175 |
|
|
|
| 1176 |
|
|
int
|
| 1177 |
|
|
noop_move_p (const_rtx insn)
|
| 1178 |
|
|
{
|
| 1179 |
|
|
rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
|
| 1180 |
|
|
|
| 1181 |
|
|
if (INSN_CODE (insn) == NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE)
|
| 1182 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1183 |
|
|
|
| 1184 |
|
|
/* Insns carrying these notes are useful later on. */
|
| 1185 |
|
|
if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX))
|
| 1186 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1187 |
|
|
|
| 1188 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET && set_noop_p (pat))
|
| 1189 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1190 |
|
|
|
| 1191 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
|
| 1192 |
|
|
{
|
| 1193 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 1194 |
|
|
/* If nothing but SETs of registers to themselves,
|
| 1195 |
|
|
this insn can also be deleted. */
|
| 1196 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
|
| 1197 |
|
|
{
|
| 1198 |
|
|
rtx tem = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
|
| 1199 |
|
|
|
| 1200 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (tem) == USE
|
| 1201 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (tem) == CLOBBER)
|
| 1202 |
|
|
continue;
|
| 1203 |
|
|
|
| 1204 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (tem) != SET || ! set_noop_p (tem))
|
| 1205 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1206 |
|
|
}
|
| 1207 |
|
|
|
| 1208 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1209 |
|
|
}
|
| 1210 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1211 |
|
|
}
|
| 1212 |
|
|
|
| 1213 |
|
|
|
| 1214 |
|
|
/* Return the last thing that X was assigned from before *PINSN. If VALID_TO
|
| 1215 |
|
|
is not NULL_RTX then verify that the object is not modified up to VALID_TO.
|
| 1216 |
|
|
If the object was modified, if we hit a partial assignment to X, or hit a
|
| 1217 |
|
|
CODE_LABEL first, return X. If we found an assignment, update *PINSN to
|
| 1218 |
|
|
point to it. ALLOW_HWREG is set to 1 if hardware registers are allowed to
|
| 1219 |
|
|
be the src. */
|
| 1220 |
|
|
|
| 1221 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 1222 |
|
|
find_last_value (rtx x, rtx *pinsn, rtx valid_to, int allow_hwreg)
|
| 1223 |
|
|
{
|
| 1224 |
|
|
rtx p;
|
| 1225 |
|
|
|
| 1226 |
|
|
for (p = PREV_INSN (*pinsn); p && !LABEL_P (p);
|
| 1227 |
|
|
p = PREV_INSN (p))
|
| 1228 |
|
|
if (INSN_P (p))
|
| 1229 |
|
|
{
|
| 1230 |
|
|
rtx set = single_set (p);
|
| 1231 |
|
|
rtx note = find_reg_note (p, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX);
|
| 1232 |
|
|
|
| 1233 |
|
|
if (set && rtx_equal_p (x, SET_DEST (set)))
|
| 1234 |
|
|
{
|
| 1235 |
|
|
rtx src = SET_SRC (set);
|
| 1236 |
|
|
|
| 1237 |
|
|
if (note && GET_CODE (XEXP (note, 0)) != EXPR_LIST)
|
| 1238 |
|
|
src = XEXP (note, 0);
|
| 1239 |
|
|
|
| 1240 |
|
|
if ((valid_to == NULL_RTX
|
| 1241 |
|
|
|| ! modified_between_p (src, PREV_INSN (p), valid_to))
|
| 1242 |
|
|
/* Reject hard registers because we don't usually want
|
| 1243 |
|
|
to use them; we'd rather use a pseudo. */
|
| 1244 |
|
|
&& (! (REG_P (src)
|
| 1245 |
|
|
&& REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER) || allow_hwreg))
|
| 1246 |
|
|
{
|
| 1247 |
|
|
*pinsn = p;
|
| 1248 |
|
|
return src;
|
| 1249 |
|
|
}
|
| 1250 |
|
|
}
|
| 1251 |
|
|
|
| 1252 |
|
|
/* If set in non-simple way, we don't have a value. */
|
| 1253 |
|
|
if (reg_set_p (x, p))
|
| 1254 |
|
|
break;
|
| 1255 |
|
|
}
|
| 1256 |
|
|
|
| 1257 |
|
|
return x;
|
| 1258 |
|
|
}
|
| 1259 |
|
|
|
| 1260 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if register in range [REGNO, ENDREGNO)
|
| 1261 |
|
|
appears either explicitly or implicitly in X
|
| 1262 |
|
|
other than being stored into.
|
| 1263 |
|
|
|
| 1264 |
|
|
References contained within the substructure at LOC do not count.
|
| 1265 |
|
|
LOC may be zero, meaning don't ignore anything. */
|
| 1266 |
|
|
|
| 1267 |
|
|
int
|
| 1268 |
|
|
refers_to_regno_p (unsigned int regno, unsigned int endregno, const_rtx x,
|
| 1269 |
|
|
rtx *loc)
|
| 1270 |
|
|
{
|
| 1271 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 1272 |
|
|
unsigned int x_regno;
|
| 1273 |
|
|
RTX_CODE code;
|
| 1274 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 1275 |
|
|
|
| 1276 |
|
|
repeat:
|
| 1277 |
|
|
/* The contents of a REG_NONNEG note is always zero, so we must come here
|
| 1278 |
|
|
upon repeat in case the last REG_NOTE is a REG_NONNEG note. */
|
| 1279 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
| 1280 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1281 |
|
|
|
| 1282 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 1283 |
|
|
|
| 1284 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 1285 |
|
|
{
|
| 1286 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 1287 |
|
|
x_regno = REGNO (x);
|
| 1288 |
|
|
|
| 1289 |
|
|
/* If we modifying the stack, frame, or argument pointer, it will
|
| 1290 |
|
|
clobber a virtual register. In fact, we could be more precise,
|
| 1291 |
|
|
but it isn't worth it. */
|
| 1292 |
|
|
if ((x_regno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
|
| 1293 |
|
|
#if FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
|
| 1294 |
|
|
|| x_regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
|
| 1295 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 1296 |
|
|
|| x_regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
|
| 1297 |
|
|
&& regno >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER && regno <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER)
|
| 1298 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1299 |
|
|
|
| 1300 |
|
|
return endregno > x_regno && regno < END_REGNO (x);
|
| 1301 |
|
|
|
| 1302 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
| 1303 |
|
|
/* If this is a SUBREG of a hard reg, we can see exactly which
|
| 1304 |
|
|
registers are being modified. Otherwise, handle normally. */
|
| 1305 |
|
|
if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
|
| 1306 |
|
|
&& REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
| 1307 |
|
|
{
|
| 1308 |
|
|
unsigned int inner_regno = subreg_regno (x);
|
| 1309 |
|
|
unsigned int inner_endregno
|
| 1310 |
|
|
= inner_regno + (inner_regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
| 1311 |
|
|
? subreg_nregs (x) : 1);
|
| 1312 |
|
|
|
| 1313 |
|
|
return endregno > inner_regno && regno < inner_endregno;
|
| 1314 |
|
|
}
|
| 1315 |
|
|
break;
|
| 1316 |
|
|
|
| 1317 |
|
|
case CLOBBER:
|
| 1318 |
|
|
case SET:
|
| 1319 |
|
|
if (&SET_DEST (x) != loc
|
| 1320 |
|
|
/* Note setting a SUBREG counts as referring to the REG it is in for
|
| 1321 |
|
|
a pseudo but not for hard registers since we can
|
| 1322 |
|
|
treat each word individually. */
|
| 1323 |
|
|
&& ((GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
|
| 1324 |
|
|
&& loc != &SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))
|
| 1325 |
|
|
&& REG_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)))
|
| 1326 |
|
|
&& REGNO (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
| 1327 |
|
|
&& refers_to_regno_p (regno, endregno,
|
| 1328 |
|
|
SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)), loc))
|
| 1329 |
|
|
|| (!REG_P (SET_DEST (x))
|
| 1330 |
|
|
&& refers_to_regno_p (regno, endregno, SET_DEST (x), loc))))
|
| 1331 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1332 |
|
|
|
| 1333 |
|
|
if (code == CLOBBER || loc == &SET_SRC (x))
|
| 1334 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1335 |
|
|
x = SET_SRC (x);
|
| 1336 |
|
|
goto repeat;
|
| 1337 |
|
|
|
| 1338 |
|
|
default:
|
| 1339 |
|
|
break;
|
| 1340 |
|
|
}
|
| 1341 |
|
|
|
| 1342 |
|
|
/* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
|
| 1343 |
|
|
|
| 1344 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 1345 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1346 |
|
|
{
|
| 1347 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e' && loc != &XEXP (x, i))
|
| 1348 |
|
|
{
|
| 1349 |
|
|
if (i == 0)
|
| 1350 |
|
|
{
|
| 1351 |
|
|
x = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 1352 |
|
|
goto repeat;
|
| 1353 |
|
|
}
|
| 1354 |
|
|
else
|
| 1355 |
|
|
if (refers_to_regno_p (regno, endregno, XEXP (x, i), loc))
|
| 1356 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1357 |
|
|
}
|
| 1358 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 1359 |
|
|
{
|
| 1360 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 1361 |
|
|
for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
|
| 1362 |
|
|
if (loc != &XVECEXP (x, i, j)
|
| 1363 |
|
|
&& refers_to_regno_p (regno, endregno, XVECEXP (x, i, j), loc))
|
| 1364 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1365 |
|
|
}
|
| 1366 |
|
|
}
|
| 1367 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1368 |
|
|
}
|
| 1369 |
|
|
|
| 1370 |
|
|
/* Nonzero if modifying X will affect IN. If X is a register or a SUBREG,
|
| 1371 |
|
|
we check if any register number in X conflicts with the relevant register
|
| 1372 |
|
|
numbers. If X is a constant, return 0. If X is a MEM, return 1 iff IN
|
| 1373 |
|
|
contains a MEM (we don't bother checking for memory addresses that can't
|
| 1374 |
|
|
conflict because we expect this to be a rare case. */
|
| 1375 |
|
|
|
| 1376 |
|
|
int
|
| 1377 |
|
|
reg_overlap_mentioned_p (const_rtx x, const_rtx in)
|
| 1378 |
|
|
{
|
| 1379 |
|
|
unsigned int regno, endregno;
|
| 1380 |
|
|
|
| 1381 |
|
|
/* If either argument is a constant, then modifying X can not
|
| 1382 |
|
|
affect IN. Here we look at IN, we can profitably combine
|
| 1383 |
|
|
CONSTANT_P (x) with the switch statement below. */
|
| 1384 |
|
|
if (CONSTANT_P (in))
|
| 1385 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1386 |
|
|
|
| 1387 |
|
|
recurse:
|
| 1388 |
|
|
switch (GET_CODE (x))
|
| 1389 |
|
|
{
|
| 1390 |
|
|
case STRICT_LOW_PART:
|
| 1391 |
|
|
case ZERO_EXTRACT:
|
| 1392 |
|
|
case SIGN_EXTRACT:
|
| 1393 |
|
|
/* Overly conservative. */
|
| 1394 |
|
|
x = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 1395 |
|
|
goto recurse;
|
| 1396 |
|
|
|
| 1397 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
| 1398 |
|
|
regno = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x));
|
| 1399 |
|
|
if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
| 1400 |
|
|
regno = subreg_regno (x);
|
| 1401 |
|
|
endregno = regno + (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
| 1402 |
|
|
? subreg_nregs (x) : 1);
|
| 1403 |
|
|
goto do_reg;
|
| 1404 |
|
|
|
| 1405 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 1406 |
|
|
regno = REGNO (x);
|
| 1407 |
|
|
endregno = END_REGNO (x);
|
| 1408 |
|
|
do_reg:
|
| 1409 |
|
|
return refers_to_regno_p (regno, endregno, in, (rtx*) 0);
|
| 1410 |
|
|
|
| 1411 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 1412 |
|
|
{
|
| 1413 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 1414 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 1415 |
|
|
|
| 1416 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (in))
|
| 1417 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1418 |
|
|
|
| 1419 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (in));
|
| 1420 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (in)) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1421 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 1422 |
|
|
{
|
| 1423 |
|
|
if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, XEXP (in, i)))
|
| 1424 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1425 |
|
|
}
|
| 1426 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 1427 |
|
|
{
|
| 1428 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 1429 |
|
|
for (j = XVECLEN (in, i) - 1; j >= 0; --j)
|
| 1430 |
|
|
if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, XVECEXP (in, i, j)))
|
| 1431 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1432 |
|
|
}
|
| 1433 |
|
|
|
| 1434 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1435 |
|
|
}
|
| 1436 |
|
|
|
| 1437 |
|
|
case SCRATCH:
|
| 1438 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 1439 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
| 1440 |
|
|
return reg_mentioned_p (x, in);
|
| 1441 |
|
|
|
| 1442 |
|
|
case PARALLEL:
|
| 1443 |
|
|
{
|
| 1444 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 1445 |
|
|
|
| 1446 |
|
|
/* If any register in here refers to it we return true. */
|
| 1447 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1448 |
|
|
if (XEXP (XVECEXP (x, 0, i), 0) != 0
|
| 1449 |
|
|
&& reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (XVECEXP (x, 0, i), 0), in))
|
| 1450 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1451 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1452 |
|
|
}
|
| 1453 |
|
|
|
| 1454 |
|
|
default:
|
| 1455 |
|
|
gcc_assert (CONSTANT_P (x));
|
| 1456 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1457 |
|
|
}
|
| 1458 |
|
|
}
|
| 1459 |
|
|
|
| 1460 |
|
|
/* Call FUN on each register or MEM that is stored into or clobbered by X.
|
| 1461 |
|
|
(X would be the pattern of an insn). DATA is an arbitrary pointer,
|
| 1462 |
|
|
ignored by note_stores, but passed to FUN.
|
| 1463 |
|
|
|
| 1464 |
|
|
FUN receives three arguments:
|
| 1465 |
|
|
1. the REG, MEM, CC0 or PC being stored in or clobbered,
|
| 1466 |
|
|
2. the SET or CLOBBER rtx that does the store,
|
| 1467 |
|
|
3. the pointer DATA provided to note_stores.
|
| 1468 |
|
|
|
| 1469 |
|
|
If the item being stored in or clobbered is a SUBREG of a hard register,
|
| 1470 |
|
|
the SUBREG will be passed. */
|
| 1471 |
|
|
|
| 1472 |
|
|
void
|
| 1473 |
|
|
note_stores (const_rtx x, void (*fun) (rtx, const_rtx, void *), void *data)
|
| 1474 |
|
|
{
|
| 1475 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 1476 |
|
|
|
| 1477 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == COND_EXEC)
|
| 1478 |
|
|
x = COND_EXEC_CODE (x);
|
| 1479 |
|
|
|
| 1480 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == SET || GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
|
| 1481 |
|
|
{
|
| 1482 |
|
|
rtx dest = SET_DEST (x);
|
| 1483 |
|
|
|
| 1484 |
|
|
while ((GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
|
| 1485 |
|
|
&& (!REG_P (SUBREG_REG (dest))
|
| 1486 |
|
|
|| REGNO (SUBREG_REG (dest)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
|
| 1487 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
|
| 1488 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
|
| 1489 |
|
|
dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
|
| 1490 |
|
|
|
| 1491 |
|
|
/* If we have a PARALLEL, SET_DEST is a list of EXPR_LIST expressions,
|
| 1492 |
|
|
each of whose first operand is a register. */
|
| 1493 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == PARALLEL)
|
| 1494 |
|
|
{
|
| 1495 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (dest, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1496 |
|
|
if (XEXP (XVECEXP (dest, 0, i), 0) != 0)
|
| 1497 |
|
|
(*fun) (XEXP (XVECEXP (dest, 0, i), 0), x, data);
|
| 1498 |
|
|
}
|
| 1499 |
|
|
else
|
| 1500 |
|
|
(*fun) (dest, x, data);
|
| 1501 |
|
|
}
|
| 1502 |
|
|
|
| 1503 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
|
| 1504 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1505 |
|
|
note_stores (XVECEXP (x, 0, i), fun, data);
|
| 1506 |
|
|
}
|
| 1507 |
|
|
|
| 1508 |
|
|
/* Like notes_stores, but call FUN for each expression that is being
|
| 1509 |
|
|
referenced in PBODY, a pointer to the PATTERN of an insn. We only call
|
| 1510 |
|
|
FUN for each expression, not any interior subexpressions. FUN receives a
|
| 1511 |
|
|
pointer to the expression and the DATA passed to this function.
|
| 1512 |
|
|
|
| 1513 |
|
|
Note that this is not quite the same test as that done in reg_referenced_p
|
| 1514 |
|
|
since that considers something as being referenced if it is being
|
| 1515 |
|
|
partially set, while we do not. */
|
| 1516 |
|
|
|
| 1517 |
|
|
void
|
| 1518 |
|
|
note_uses (rtx *pbody, void (*fun) (rtx *, void *), void *data)
|
| 1519 |
|
|
{
|
| 1520 |
|
|
rtx body = *pbody;
|
| 1521 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 1522 |
|
|
|
| 1523 |
|
|
switch (GET_CODE (body))
|
| 1524 |
|
|
{
|
| 1525 |
|
|
case COND_EXEC:
|
| 1526 |
|
|
(*fun) (&COND_EXEC_TEST (body), data);
|
| 1527 |
|
|
note_uses (&COND_EXEC_CODE (body), fun, data);
|
| 1528 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1529 |
|
|
|
| 1530 |
|
|
case PARALLEL:
|
| 1531 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (body, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1532 |
|
|
note_uses (&XVECEXP (body, 0, i), fun, data);
|
| 1533 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1534 |
|
|
|
| 1535 |
|
|
case SEQUENCE:
|
| 1536 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (body, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1537 |
|
|
note_uses (&PATTERN (XVECEXP (body, 0, i)), fun, data);
|
| 1538 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1539 |
|
|
|
| 1540 |
|
|
case USE:
|
| 1541 |
|
|
(*fun) (&XEXP (body, 0), data);
|
| 1542 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1543 |
|
|
|
| 1544 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
| 1545 |
|
|
for (i = ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT_LENGTH (body) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1546 |
|
|
(*fun) (&ASM_OPERANDS_INPUT (body, i), data);
|
| 1547 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1548 |
|
|
|
| 1549 |
|
|
case TRAP_IF:
|
| 1550 |
|
|
(*fun) (&TRAP_CONDITION (body), data);
|
| 1551 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1552 |
|
|
|
| 1553 |
|
|
case PREFETCH:
|
| 1554 |
|
|
(*fun) (&XEXP (body, 0), data);
|
| 1555 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1556 |
|
|
|
| 1557 |
|
|
case UNSPEC:
|
| 1558 |
|
|
case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
|
| 1559 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (body, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1560 |
|
|
(*fun) (&XVECEXP (body, 0, i), data);
|
| 1561 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1562 |
|
|
|
| 1563 |
|
|
case CLOBBER:
|
| 1564 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (XEXP (body, 0)))
|
| 1565 |
|
|
(*fun) (&XEXP (XEXP (body, 0), 0), data);
|
| 1566 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1567 |
|
|
|
| 1568 |
|
|
case SET:
|
| 1569 |
|
|
{
|
| 1570 |
|
|
rtx dest = SET_DEST (body);
|
| 1571 |
|
|
|
| 1572 |
|
|
/* For sets we replace everything in source plus registers in memory
|
| 1573 |
|
|
expression in store and operands of a ZERO_EXTRACT. */
|
| 1574 |
|
|
(*fun) (&SET_SRC (body), data);
|
| 1575 |
|
|
|
| 1576 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
|
| 1577 |
|
|
{
|
| 1578 |
|
|
(*fun) (&XEXP (dest, 1), data);
|
| 1579 |
|
|
(*fun) (&XEXP (dest, 2), data);
|
| 1580 |
|
|
}
|
| 1581 |
|
|
|
| 1582 |
|
|
while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
|
| 1583 |
|
|
dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
|
| 1584 |
|
|
|
| 1585 |
|
|
if (MEM_P (dest))
|
| 1586 |
|
|
(*fun) (&XEXP (dest, 0), data);
|
| 1587 |
|
|
}
|
| 1588 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1589 |
|
|
|
| 1590 |
|
|
default:
|
| 1591 |
|
|
/* All the other possibilities never store. */
|
| 1592 |
|
|
(*fun) (pbody, data);
|
| 1593 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1594 |
|
|
}
|
| 1595 |
|
|
}
|
| 1596 |
|
|
|
| 1597 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if X's old contents don't survive after INSN.
|
| 1598 |
|
|
This will be true if X is (cc0) or if X is a register and
|
| 1599 |
|
|
X dies in INSN or because INSN entirely sets X.
|
| 1600 |
|
|
|
| 1601 |
|
|
"Entirely set" means set directly and not through a SUBREG, or
|
| 1602 |
|
|
ZERO_EXTRACT, so no trace of the old contents remains.
|
| 1603 |
|
|
Likewise, REG_INC does not count.
|
| 1604 |
|
|
|
| 1605 |
|
|
REG may be a hard or pseudo reg. Renumbering is not taken into account,
|
| 1606 |
|
|
but for this use that makes no difference, since regs don't overlap
|
| 1607 |
|
|
during their lifetimes. Therefore, this function may be used
|
| 1608 |
|
|
at any time after deaths have been computed.
|
| 1609 |
|
|
|
| 1610 |
|
|
If REG is a hard reg that occupies multiple machine registers, this
|
| 1611 |
|
|
function will only return 1 if each of those registers will be replaced
|
| 1612 |
|
|
by INSN. */
|
| 1613 |
|
|
|
| 1614 |
|
|
int
|
| 1615 |
|
|
dead_or_set_p (const_rtx insn, const_rtx x)
|
| 1616 |
|
|
{
|
| 1617 |
|
|
unsigned int regno, end_regno;
|
| 1618 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
| 1619 |
|
|
|
| 1620 |
|
|
/* Can't use cc0_rtx below since this file is used by genattrtab.c. */
|
| 1621 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == CC0)
|
| 1622 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1623 |
|
|
|
| 1624 |
|
|
gcc_assert (REG_P (x));
|
| 1625 |
|
|
|
| 1626 |
|
|
regno = REGNO (x);
|
| 1627 |
|
|
end_regno = END_REGNO (x);
|
| 1628 |
|
|
for (i = regno; i < end_regno; i++)
|
| 1629 |
|
|
if (! dead_or_set_regno_p (insn, i))
|
| 1630 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1631 |
|
|
|
| 1632 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1633 |
|
|
}
|
| 1634 |
|
|
|
| 1635 |
|
|
/* Return TRUE iff DEST is a register or subreg of a register and
|
| 1636 |
|
|
doesn't change the number of words of the inner register, and any
|
| 1637 |
|
|
part of the register is TEST_REGNO. */
|
| 1638 |
|
|
|
| 1639 |
|
|
static bool
|
| 1640 |
|
|
covers_regno_no_parallel_p (const_rtx dest, unsigned int test_regno)
|
| 1641 |
|
|
{
|
| 1642 |
|
|
unsigned int regno, endregno;
|
| 1643 |
|
|
|
| 1644 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
|
| 1645 |
|
|
&& (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
|
| 1646 |
|
|
+ UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
|
| 1647 |
|
|
== ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest)))
|
| 1648 |
|
|
+ UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)))
|
| 1649 |
|
|
dest = SUBREG_REG (dest);
|
| 1650 |
|
|
|
| 1651 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (dest))
|
| 1652 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 1653 |
|
|
|
| 1654 |
|
|
regno = REGNO (dest);
|
| 1655 |
|
|
endregno = END_REGNO (dest);
|
| 1656 |
|
|
return (test_regno >= regno && test_regno < endregno);
|
| 1657 |
|
|
}
|
| 1658 |
|
|
|
| 1659 |
|
|
/* Like covers_regno_no_parallel_p, but also handles PARALLELs where
|
| 1660 |
|
|
any member matches the covers_regno_no_parallel_p criteria. */
|
| 1661 |
|
|
|
| 1662 |
|
|
static bool
|
| 1663 |
|
|
covers_regno_p (const_rtx dest, unsigned int test_regno)
|
| 1664 |
|
|
{
|
| 1665 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (dest) == PARALLEL)
|
| 1666 |
|
|
{
|
| 1667 |
|
|
/* Some targets place small structures in registers for return
|
| 1668 |
|
|
values of functions, and those registers are wrapped in
|
| 1669 |
|
|
PARALLELs that we may see as the destination of a SET. */
|
| 1670 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 1671 |
|
|
|
| 1672 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (dest, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1673 |
|
|
{
|
| 1674 |
|
|
rtx inner = XEXP (XVECEXP (dest, 0, i), 0);
|
| 1675 |
|
|
if (inner != NULL_RTX
|
| 1676 |
|
|
&& covers_regno_no_parallel_p (inner, test_regno))
|
| 1677 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 1678 |
|
|
}
|
| 1679 |
|
|
|
| 1680 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 1681 |
|
|
}
|
| 1682 |
|
|
else
|
| 1683 |
|
|
return covers_regno_no_parallel_p (dest, test_regno);
|
| 1684 |
|
|
}
|
| 1685 |
|
|
|
| 1686 |
|
|
/* Utility function for dead_or_set_p to check an individual register. */
|
| 1687 |
|
|
|
| 1688 |
|
|
int
|
| 1689 |
|
|
dead_or_set_regno_p (const_rtx insn, unsigned int test_regno)
|
| 1690 |
|
|
{
|
| 1691 |
|
|
const_rtx pattern;
|
| 1692 |
|
|
|
| 1693 |
|
|
/* See if there is a death note for something that includes TEST_REGNO. */
|
| 1694 |
|
|
if (find_regno_note (insn, REG_DEAD, test_regno))
|
| 1695 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1696 |
|
|
|
| 1697 |
|
|
if (CALL_P (insn)
|
| 1698 |
|
|
&& find_regno_fusage (insn, CLOBBER, test_regno))
|
| 1699 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1700 |
|
|
|
| 1701 |
|
|
pattern = PATTERN (insn);
|
| 1702 |
|
|
|
| 1703 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (pattern) == COND_EXEC)
|
| 1704 |
|
|
pattern = COND_EXEC_CODE (pattern);
|
| 1705 |
|
|
|
| 1706 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (pattern) == SET)
|
| 1707 |
|
|
return covers_regno_p (SET_DEST (pattern), test_regno);
|
| 1708 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (pattern) == PARALLEL)
|
| 1709 |
|
|
{
|
| 1710 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 1711 |
|
|
|
| 1712 |
|
|
for (i = XVECLEN (pattern, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 1713 |
|
|
{
|
| 1714 |
|
|
rtx body = XVECEXP (pattern, 0, i);
|
| 1715 |
|
|
|
| 1716 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (body) == COND_EXEC)
|
| 1717 |
|
|
body = COND_EXEC_CODE (body);
|
| 1718 |
|
|
|
| 1719 |
|
|
if ((GET_CODE (body) == SET || GET_CODE (body) == CLOBBER)
|
| 1720 |
|
|
&& covers_regno_p (SET_DEST (body), test_regno))
|
| 1721 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1722 |
|
|
}
|
| 1723 |
|
|
}
|
| 1724 |
|
|
|
| 1725 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1726 |
|
|
}
|
| 1727 |
|
|
|
| 1728 |
|
|
/* Return the reg-note of kind KIND in insn INSN, if there is one.
|
| 1729 |
|
|
If DATUM is nonzero, look for one whose datum is DATUM. */
|
| 1730 |
|
|
|
| 1731 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 1732 |
|
|
find_reg_note (const_rtx insn, enum reg_note kind, const_rtx datum)
|
| 1733 |
|
|
{
|
| 1734 |
|
|
rtx link;
|
| 1735 |
|
|
|
| 1736 |
|
|
gcc_checking_assert (insn);
|
| 1737 |
|
|
|
| 1738 |
|
|
/* Ignore anything that is not an INSN, JUMP_INSN or CALL_INSN. */
|
| 1739 |
|
|
if (! INSN_P (insn))
|
| 1740 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1741 |
|
|
if (datum == 0)
|
| 1742 |
|
|
{
|
| 1743 |
|
|
for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
|
| 1744 |
|
|
if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == kind)
|
| 1745 |
|
|
return link;
|
| 1746 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1747 |
|
|
}
|
| 1748 |
|
|
|
| 1749 |
|
|
for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
|
| 1750 |
|
|
if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == kind && datum == XEXP (link, 0))
|
| 1751 |
|
|
return link;
|
| 1752 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1753 |
|
|
}
|
| 1754 |
|
|
|
| 1755 |
|
|
/* Return the reg-note of kind KIND in insn INSN which applies to register
|
| 1756 |
|
|
number REGNO, if any. Return 0 if there is no such reg-note. Note that
|
| 1757 |
|
|
the REGNO of this NOTE need not be REGNO if REGNO is a hard register;
|
| 1758 |
|
|
it might be the case that the note overlaps REGNO. */
|
| 1759 |
|
|
|
| 1760 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 1761 |
|
|
find_regno_note (const_rtx insn, enum reg_note kind, unsigned int regno)
|
| 1762 |
|
|
{
|
| 1763 |
|
|
rtx link;
|
| 1764 |
|
|
|
| 1765 |
|
|
/* Ignore anything that is not an INSN, JUMP_INSN or CALL_INSN. */
|
| 1766 |
|
|
if (! INSN_P (insn))
|
| 1767 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1768 |
|
|
|
| 1769 |
|
|
for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
|
| 1770 |
|
|
if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == kind
|
| 1771 |
|
|
/* Verify that it is a register, so that scratch and MEM won't cause a
|
| 1772 |
|
|
problem here. */
|
| 1773 |
|
|
&& REG_P (XEXP (link, 0))
|
| 1774 |
|
|
&& REGNO (XEXP (link, 0)) <= regno
|
| 1775 |
|
|
&& END_REGNO (XEXP (link, 0)) > regno)
|
| 1776 |
|
|
return link;
|
| 1777 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1778 |
|
|
}
|
| 1779 |
|
|
|
| 1780 |
|
|
/* Return a REG_EQUIV or REG_EQUAL note if insn has only a single set and
|
| 1781 |
|
|
has such a note. */
|
| 1782 |
|
|
|
| 1783 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 1784 |
|
|
find_reg_equal_equiv_note (const_rtx insn)
|
| 1785 |
|
|
{
|
| 1786 |
|
|
rtx link;
|
| 1787 |
|
|
|
| 1788 |
|
|
if (!INSN_P (insn))
|
| 1789 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1790 |
|
|
|
| 1791 |
|
|
for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
|
| 1792 |
|
|
if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_EQUAL
|
| 1793 |
|
|
|| REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_EQUIV)
|
| 1794 |
|
|
{
|
| 1795 |
|
|
/* FIXME: We should never have REG_EQUAL/REG_EQUIV notes on
|
| 1796 |
|
|
insns that have multiple sets. Checking single_set to
|
| 1797 |
|
|
make sure of this is not the proper check, as explained
|
| 1798 |
|
|
in the comment in set_unique_reg_note.
|
| 1799 |
|
|
|
| 1800 |
|
|
This should be changed into an assert. */
|
| 1801 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL && multiple_sets (insn))
|
| 1802 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1803 |
|
|
return link;
|
| 1804 |
|
|
}
|
| 1805 |
|
|
return NULL;
|
| 1806 |
|
|
}
|
| 1807 |
|
|
|
| 1808 |
|
|
/* Check whether INSN is a single_set whose source is known to be
|
| 1809 |
|
|
equivalent to a constant. Return that constant if so, otherwise
|
| 1810 |
|
|
return null. */
|
| 1811 |
|
|
|
| 1812 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 1813 |
|
|
find_constant_src (const_rtx insn)
|
| 1814 |
|
|
{
|
| 1815 |
|
|
rtx note, set, x;
|
| 1816 |
|
|
|
| 1817 |
|
|
set = single_set (insn);
|
| 1818 |
|
|
if (set)
|
| 1819 |
|
|
{
|
| 1820 |
|
|
x = avoid_constant_pool_reference (SET_SRC (set));
|
| 1821 |
|
|
if (CONSTANT_P (x))
|
| 1822 |
|
|
return x;
|
| 1823 |
|
|
}
|
| 1824 |
|
|
|
| 1825 |
|
|
note = find_reg_equal_equiv_note (insn);
|
| 1826 |
|
|
if (note && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (note, 0)))
|
| 1827 |
|
|
return XEXP (note, 0);
|
| 1828 |
|
|
|
| 1829 |
|
|
return NULL_RTX;
|
| 1830 |
|
|
}
|
| 1831 |
|
|
|
| 1832 |
|
|
/* Return true if DATUM, or any overlap of DATUM, of kind CODE is found
|
| 1833 |
|
|
in the CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE information of INSN. */
|
| 1834 |
|
|
|
| 1835 |
|
|
int
|
| 1836 |
|
|
find_reg_fusage (const_rtx insn, enum rtx_code code, const_rtx datum)
|
| 1837 |
|
|
{
|
| 1838 |
|
|
/* If it's not a CALL_INSN, it can't possibly have a
|
| 1839 |
|
|
CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE field, so don't bother checking. */
|
| 1840 |
|
|
if (!CALL_P (insn))
|
| 1841 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1842 |
|
|
|
| 1843 |
|
|
gcc_assert (datum);
|
| 1844 |
|
|
|
| 1845 |
|
|
if (!REG_P (datum))
|
| 1846 |
|
|
{
|
| 1847 |
|
|
rtx link;
|
| 1848 |
|
|
|
| 1849 |
|
|
for (link = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn);
|
| 1850 |
|
|
link;
|
| 1851 |
|
|
link = XEXP (link, 1))
|
| 1852 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (XEXP (link, 0)) == code
|
| 1853 |
|
|
&& rtx_equal_p (datum, XEXP (XEXP (link, 0), 0)))
|
| 1854 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1855 |
|
|
}
|
| 1856 |
|
|
else
|
| 1857 |
|
|
{
|
| 1858 |
|
|
unsigned int regno = REGNO (datum);
|
| 1859 |
|
|
|
| 1860 |
|
|
/* CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE information cannot contain references
|
| 1861 |
|
|
to pseudo registers, so don't bother checking. */
|
| 1862 |
|
|
|
| 1863 |
|
|
if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
| 1864 |
|
|
{
|
| 1865 |
|
|
unsigned int end_regno = END_HARD_REGNO (datum);
|
| 1866 |
|
|
unsigned int i;
|
| 1867 |
|
|
|
| 1868 |
|
|
for (i = regno; i < end_regno; i++)
|
| 1869 |
|
|
if (find_regno_fusage (insn, code, i))
|
| 1870 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1871 |
|
|
}
|
| 1872 |
|
|
}
|
| 1873 |
|
|
|
| 1874 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1875 |
|
|
}
|
| 1876 |
|
|
|
| 1877 |
|
|
/* Return true if REGNO, or any overlap of REGNO, of kind CODE is found
|
| 1878 |
|
|
in the CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE information of INSN. */
|
| 1879 |
|
|
|
| 1880 |
|
|
int
|
| 1881 |
|
|
find_regno_fusage (const_rtx insn, enum rtx_code code, unsigned int regno)
|
| 1882 |
|
|
{
|
| 1883 |
|
|
rtx link;
|
| 1884 |
|
|
|
| 1885 |
|
|
/* CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE information cannot contain references
|
| 1886 |
|
|
to pseudo registers, so don't bother checking. */
|
| 1887 |
|
|
|
| 1888 |
|
|
if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
| 1889 |
|
|
|| !CALL_P (insn) )
|
| 1890 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1891 |
|
|
|
| 1892 |
|
|
for (link = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
|
| 1893 |
|
|
{
|
| 1894 |
|
|
rtx op, reg;
|
| 1895 |
|
|
|
| 1896 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (op = XEXP (link, 0)) == code
|
| 1897 |
|
|
&& REG_P (reg = XEXP (op, 0))
|
| 1898 |
|
|
&& REGNO (reg) <= regno
|
| 1899 |
|
|
&& END_HARD_REGNO (reg) > regno)
|
| 1900 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 1901 |
|
|
}
|
| 1902 |
|
|
|
| 1903 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 1904 |
|
|
}
|
| 1905 |
|
|
|
| 1906 |
|
|
|
| 1907 |
|
|
/* Allocate a register note with kind KIND and datum DATUM. LIST is
|
| 1908 |
|
|
stored as the pointer to the next register note. */
|
| 1909 |
|
|
|
| 1910 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 1911 |
|
|
alloc_reg_note (enum reg_note kind, rtx datum, rtx list)
|
| 1912 |
|
|
{
|
| 1913 |
|
|
rtx note;
|
| 1914 |
|
|
|
| 1915 |
|
|
switch (kind)
|
| 1916 |
|
|
{
|
| 1917 |
|
|
case REG_CC_SETTER:
|
| 1918 |
|
|
case REG_CC_USER:
|
| 1919 |
|
|
case REG_LABEL_TARGET:
|
| 1920 |
|
|
case REG_LABEL_OPERAND:
|
| 1921 |
|
|
case REG_TM:
|
| 1922 |
|
|
/* These types of register notes use an INSN_LIST rather than an
|
| 1923 |
|
|
EXPR_LIST, so that copying is done right and dumps look
|
| 1924 |
|
|
better. */
|
| 1925 |
|
|
note = alloc_INSN_LIST (datum, list);
|
| 1926 |
|
|
PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, kind);
|
| 1927 |
|
|
break;
|
| 1928 |
|
|
|
| 1929 |
|
|
default:
|
| 1930 |
|
|
note = alloc_EXPR_LIST (kind, datum, list);
|
| 1931 |
|
|
break;
|
| 1932 |
|
|
}
|
| 1933 |
|
|
|
| 1934 |
|
|
return note;
|
| 1935 |
|
|
}
|
| 1936 |
|
|
|
| 1937 |
|
|
/* Add register note with kind KIND and datum DATUM to INSN. */
|
| 1938 |
|
|
|
| 1939 |
|
|
void
|
| 1940 |
|
|
add_reg_note (rtx insn, enum reg_note kind, rtx datum)
|
| 1941 |
|
|
{
|
| 1942 |
|
|
REG_NOTES (insn) = alloc_reg_note (kind, datum, REG_NOTES (insn));
|
| 1943 |
|
|
}
|
| 1944 |
|
|
|
| 1945 |
|
|
/* Remove register note NOTE from the REG_NOTES of INSN. */
|
| 1946 |
|
|
|
| 1947 |
|
|
void
|
| 1948 |
|
|
remove_note (rtx insn, const_rtx note)
|
| 1949 |
|
|
{
|
| 1950 |
|
|
rtx link;
|
| 1951 |
|
|
|
| 1952 |
|
|
if (note == NULL_RTX)
|
| 1953 |
|
|
return;
|
| 1954 |
|
|
|
| 1955 |
|
|
if (REG_NOTES (insn) == note)
|
| 1956 |
|
|
REG_NOTES (insn) = XEXP (note, 1);
|
| 1957 |
|
|
else
|
| 1958 |
|
|
for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
|
| 1959 |
|
|
if (XEXP (link, 1) == note)
|
| 1960 |
|
|
{
|
| 1961 |
|
|
XEXP (link, 1) = XEXP (note, 1);
|
| 1962 |
|
|
break;
|
| 1963 |
|
|
}
|
| 1964 |
|
|
|
| 1965 |
|
|
switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (note))
|
| 1966 |
|
|
{
|
| 1967 |
|
|
case REG_EQUAL:
|
| 1968 |
|
|
case REG_EQUIV:
|
| 1969 |
|
|
df_notes_rescan (insn);
|
| 1970 |
|
|
break;
|
| 1971 |
|
|
default:
|
| 1972 |
|
|
break;
|
| 1973 |
|
|
}
|
| 1974 |
|
|
}
|
| 1975 |
|
|
|
| 1976 |
|
|
/* Remove REG_EQUAL and/or REG_EQUIV notes if INSN has such notes. */
|
| 1977 |
|
|
|
| 1978 |
|
|
void
|
| 1979 |
|
|
remove_reg_equal_equiv_notes (rtx insn)
|
| 1980 |
|
|
{
|
| 1981 |
|
|
rtx *loc;
|
| 1982 |
|
|
|
| 1983 |
|
|
loc = ®_NOTES (insn);
|
| 1984 |
|
|
while (*loc)
|
| 1985 |
|
|
{
|
| 1986 |
|
|
enum reg_note kind = REG_NOTE_KIND (*loc);
|
| 1987 |
|
|
if (kind == REG_EQUAL || kind == REG_EQUIV)
|
| 1988 |
|
|
*loc = XEXP (*loc, 1);
|
| 1989 |
|
|
else
|
| 1990 |
|
|
loc = &XEXP (*loc, 1);
|
| 1991 |
|
|
}
|
| 1992 |
|
|
}
|
| 1993 |
|
|
|
| 1994 |
|
|
/* Remove all REG_EQUAL and REG_EQUIV notes referring to REGNO. */
|
| 1995 |
|
|
|
| 1996 |
|
|
void
|
| 1997 |
|
|
remove_reg_equal_equiv_notes_for_regno (unsigned int regno)
|
| 1998 |
|
|
{
|
| 1999 |
|
|
df_ref eq_use;
|
| 2000 |
|
|
|
| 2001 |
|
|
if (!df)
|
| 2002 |
|
|
return;
|
| 2003 |
|
|
|
| 2004 |
|
|
/* This loop is a little tricky. We cannot just go down the chain because
|
| 2005 |
|
|
it is being modified by some actions in the loop. So we just iterate
|
| 2006 |
|
|
over the head. We plan to drain the list anyway. */
|
| 2007 |
|
|
while ((eq_use = DF_REG_EQ_USE_CHAIN (regno)) != NULL)
|
| 2008 |
|
|
{
|
| 2009 |
|
|
rtx insn = DF_REF_INSN (eq_use);
|
| 2010 |
|
|
rtx note = find_reg_equal_equiv_note (insn);
|
| 2011 |
|
|
|
| 2012 |
|
|
/* This assert is generally triggered when someone deletes a REG_EQUAL
|
| 2013 |
|
|
or REG_EQUIV note by hacking the list manually rather than calling
|
| 2014 |
|
|
remove_note. */
|
| 2015 |
|
|
gcc_assert (note);
|
| 2016 |
|
|
|
| 2017 |
|
|
remove_note (insn, note);
|
| 2018 |
|
|
}
|
| 2019 |
|
|
}
|
| 2020 |
|
|
|
| 2021 |
|
|
/* Search LISTP (an EXPR_LIST) for an entry whose first operand is NODE and
|
| 2022 |
|
|
return 1 if it is found. A simple equality test is used to determine if
|
| 2023 |
|
|
NODE matches. */
|
| 2024 |
|
|
|
| 2025 |
|
|
int
|
| 2026 |
|
|
in_expr_list_p (const_rtx listp, const_rtx node)
|
| 2027 |
|
|
{
|
| 2028 |
|
|
const_rtx x;
|
| 2029 |
|
|
|
| 2030 |
|
|
for (x = listp; x; x = XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 2031 |
|
|
if (node == XEXP (x, 0))
|
| 2032 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2033 |
|
|
|
| 2034 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2035 |
|
|
}
|
| 2036 |
|
|
|
| 2037 |
|
|
/* Search LISTP (an EXPR_LIST) for an entry whose first operand is NODE and
|
| 2038 |
|
|
remove that entry from the list if it is found.
|
| 2039 |
|
|
|
| 2040 |
|
|
A simple equality test is used to determine if NODE matches. */
|
| 2041 |
|
|
|
| 2042 |
|
|
void
|
| 2043 |
|
|
remove_node_from_expr_list (const_rtx node, rtx *listp)
|
| 2044 |
|
|
{
|
| 2045 |
|
|
rtx temp = *listp;
|
| 2046 |
|
|
rtx prev = NULL_RTX;
|
| 2047 |
|
|
|
| 2048 |
|
|
while (temp)
|
| 2049 |
|
|
{
|
| 2050 |
|
|
if (node == XEXP (temp, 0))
|
| 2051 |
|
|
{
|
| 2052 |
|
|
/* Splice the node out of the list. */
|
| 2053 |
|
|
if (prev)
|
| 2054 |
|
|
XEXP (prev, 1) = XEXP (temp, 1);
|
| 2055 |
|
|
else
|
| 2056 |
|
|
*listp = XEXP (temp, 1);
|
| 2057 |
|
|
|
| 2058 |
|
|
return;
|
| 2059 |
|
|
}
|
| 2060 |
|
|
|
| 2061 |
|
|
prev = temp;
|
| 2062 |
|
|
temp = XEXP (temp, 1);
|
| 2063 |
|
|
}
|
| 2064 |
|
|
}
|
| 2065 |
|
|
|
| 2066 |
|
|
/* Nonzero if X contains any volatile instructions. These are instructions
|
| 2067 |
|
|
which may cause unpredictable machine state instructions, and thus no
|
| 2068 |
|
|
instructions should be moved or combined across them. This includes
|
| 2069 |
|
|
only volatile asms and UNSPEC_VOLATILE instructions. */
|
| 2070 |
|
|
|
| 2071 |
|
|
int
|
| 2072 |
|
|
volatile_insn_p (const_rtx x)
|
| 2073 |
|
|
{
|
| 2074 |
|
|
const RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 2075 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 2076 |
|
|
{
|
| 2077 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 2078 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 2079 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 2080 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 2081 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 2082 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 2083 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 2084 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
| 2085 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 2086 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 2087 |
|
|
case SCRATCH:
|
| 2088 |
|
|
case CLOBBER:
|
| 2089 |
|
|
case ADDR_VEC:
|
| 2090 |
|
|
case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
|
| 2091 |
|
|
case CALL:
|
| 2092 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 2093 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2094 |
|
|
|
| 2095 |
|
|
case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
|
| 2096 |
|
|
/* case TRAP_IF: This isn't clear yet. */
|
| 2097 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2098 |
|
|
|
| 2099 |
|
|
case ASM_INPUT:
|
| 2100 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
| 2101 |
|
|
if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
|
| 2102 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2103 |
|
|
|
| 2104 |
|
|
default:
|
| 2105 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2106 |
|
|
}
|
| 2107 |
|
|
|
| 2108 |
|
|
/* Recursively scan the operands of this expression. */
|
| 2109 |
|
|
|
| 2110 |
|
|
{
|
| 2111 |
|
|
const char *const fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 2112 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 2113 |
|
|
|
| 2114 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 2115 |
|
|
{
|
| 2116 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 2117 |
|
|
{
|
| 2118 |
|
|
if (volatile_insn_p (XEXP (x, i)))
|
| 2119 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2120 |
|
|
}
|
| 2121 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 2122 |
|
|
{
|
| 2123 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 2124 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
| 2125 |
|
|
if (volatile_insn_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j)))
|
| 2126 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2127 |
|
|
}
|
| 2128 |
|
|
}
|
| 2129 |
|
|
}
|
| 2130 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2131 |
|
|
}
|
| 2132 |
|
|
|
| 2133 |
|
|
/* Nonzero if X contains any volatile memory references
|
| 2134 |
|
|
UNSPEC_VOLATILE operations or volatile ASM_OPERANDS expressions. */
|
| 2135 |
|
|
|
| 2136 |
|
|
int
|
| 2137 |
|
|
volatile_refs_p (const_rtx x)
|
| 2138 |
|
|
{
|
| 2139 |
|
|
const RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 2140 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 2141 |
|
|
{
|
| 2142 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 2143 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 2144 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 2145 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 2146 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 2147 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 2148 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 2149 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
| 2150 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 2151 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 2152 |
|
|
case SCRATCH:
|
| 2153 |
|
|
case CLOBBER:
|
| 2154 |
|
|
case ADDR_VEC:
|
| 2155 |
|
|
case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
|
| 2156 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2157 |
|
|
|
| 2158 |
|
|
case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
|
| 2159 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2160 |
|
|
|
| 2161 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 2162 |
|
|
case ASM_INPUT:
|
| 2163 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
| 2164 |
|
|
if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
|
| 2165 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2166 |
|
|
|
| 2167 |
|
|
default:
|
| 2168 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2169 |
|
|
}
|
| 2170 |
|
|
|
| 2171 |
|
|
/* Recursively scan the operands of this expression. */
|
| 2172 |
|
|
|
| 2173 |
|
|
{
|
| 2174 |
|
|
const char *const fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 2175 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 2176 |
|
|
|
| 2177 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 2178 |
|
|
{
|
| 2179 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 2180 |
|
|
{
|
| 2181 |
|
|
if (volatile_refs_p (XEXP (x, i)))
|
| 2182 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2183 |
|
|
}
|
| 2184 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 2185 |
|
|
{
|
| 2186 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 2187 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
| 2188 |
|
|
if (volatile_refs_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j)))
|
| 2189 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2190 |
|
|
}
|
| 2191 |
|
|
}
|
| 2192 |
|
|
}
|
| 2193 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2194 |
|
|
}
|
| 2195 |
|
|
|
| 2196 |
|
|
/* Similar to above, except that it also rejects register pre- and post-
|
| 2197 |
|
|
incrementing. */
|
| 2198 |
|
|
|
| 2199 |
|
|
int
|
| 2200 |
|
|
side_effects_p (const_rtx x)
|
| 2201 |
|
|
{
|
| 2202 |
|
|
const RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 2203 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 2204 |
|
|
{
|
| 2205 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 2206 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 2207 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 2208 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 2209 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 2210 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 2211 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 2212 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
| 2213 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 2214 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 2215 |
|
|
case SCRATCH:
|
| 2216 |
|
|
case ADDR_VEC:
|
| 2217 |
|
|
case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
|
| 2218 |
|
|
case VAR_LOCATION:
|
| 2219 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2220 |
|
|
|
| 2221 |
|
|
case CLOBBER:
|
| 2222 |
|
|
/* Reject CLOBBER with a non-VOID mode. These are made by combine.c
|
| 2223 |
|
|
when some combination can't be done. If we see one, don't think
|
| 2224 |
|
|
that we can simplify the expression. */
|
| 2225 |
|
|
return (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode);
|
| 2226 |
|
|
|
| 2227 |
|
|
case PRE_INC:
|
| 2228 |
|
|
case PRE_DEC:
|
| 2229 |
|
|
case POST_INC:
|
| 2230 |
|
|
case POST_DEC:
|
| 2231 |
|
|
case PRE_MODIFY:
|
| 2232 |
|
|
case POST_MODIFY:
|
| 2233 |
|
|
case CALL:
|
| 2234 |
|
|
case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
|
| 2235 |
|
|
/* case TRAP_IF: This isn't clear yet. */
|
| 2236 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2237 |
|
|
|
| 2238 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 2239 |
|
|
case ASM_INPUT:
|
| 2240 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
| 2241 |
|
|
if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
|
| 2242 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2243 |
|
|
|
| 2244 |
|
|
default:
|
| 2245 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2246 |
|
|
}
|
| 2247 |
|
|
|
| 2248 |
|
|
/* Recursively scan the operands of this expression. */
|
| 2249 |
|
|
|
| 2250 |
|
|
{
|
| 2251 |
|
|
const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 2252 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 2253 |
|
|
|
| 2254 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 2255 |
|
|
{
|
| 2256 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 2257 |
|
|
{
|
| 2258 |
|
|
if (side_effects_p (XEXP (x, i)))
|
| 2259 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2260 |
|
|
}
|
| 2261 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 2262 |
|
|
{
|
| 2263 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 2264 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
| 2265 |
|
|
if (side_effects_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j)))
|
| 2266 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2267 |
|
|
}
|
| 2268 |
|
|
}
|
| 2269 |
|
|
}
|
| 2270 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2271 |
|
|
}
|
| 2272 |
|
|
|
| 2273 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if evaluating rtx X might cause a trap.
|
| 2274 |
|
|
FLAGS controls how to consider MEMs. A nonzero means the context
|
| 2275 |
|
|
of the access may have changed from the original, such that the
|
| 2276 |
|
|
address may have become invalid. */
|
| 2277 |
|
|
|
| 2278 |
|
|
int
|
| 2279 |
|
|
may_trap_p_1 (const_rtx x, unsigned flags)
|
| 2280 |
|
|
{
|
| 2281 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 2282 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
| 2283 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 2284 |
|
|
|
| 2285 |
|
|
/* We make no distinction currently, but this function is part of
|
| 2286 |
|
|
the internal target-hooks ABI so we keep the parameter as
|
| 2287 |
|
|
"unsigned flags". */
|
| 2288 |
|
|
bool code_changed = flags != 0;
|
| 2289 |
|
|
|
| 2290 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
| 2291 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2292 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 2293 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 2294 |
|
|
{
|
| 2295 |
|
|
/* Handle these cases quickly. */
|
| 2296 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 2297 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 2298 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 2299 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 2300 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 2301 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 2302 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 2303 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 2304 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
| 2305 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 2306 |
|
|
case SCRATCH:
|
| 2307 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2308 |
|
|
|
| 2309 |
|
|
case UNSPEC:
|
| 2310 |
|
|
case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
|
| 2311 |
|
|
return targetm.unspec_may_trap_p (x, flags);
|
| 2312 |
|
|
|
| 2313 |
|
|
case ASM_INPUT:
|
| 2314 |
|
|
case TRAP_IF:
|
| 2315 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2316 |
|
|
|
| 2317 |
|
|
case ASM_OPERANDS:
|
| 2318 |
|
|
return MEM_VOLATILE_P (x);
|
| 2319 |
|
|
|
| 2320 |
|
|
/* Memory ref can trap unless it's a static var or a stack slot. */
|
| 2321 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 2322 |
|
|
/* Recognize specific pattern of stack checking probes. */
|
| 2323 |
|
|
if (flag_stack_check
|
| 2324 |
|
|
&& MEM_VOLATILE_P (x)
|
| 2325 |
|
|
&& XEXP (x, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx)
|
| 2326 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2327 |
|
|
if (/* MEM_NOTRAP_P only relates to the actual position of the memory
|
| 2328 |
|
|
reference; moving it out of context such as when moving code
|
| 2329 |
|
|
when optimizing, might cause its address to become invalid. */
|
| 2330 |
|
|
code_changed
|
| 2331 |
|
|
|| !MEM_NOTRAP_P (x))
|
| 2332 |
|
|
{
|
| 2333 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT size = MEM_SIZE_KNOWN_P (x) ? MEM_SIZE (x) : 0;
|
| 2334 |
|
|
return rtx_addr_can_trap_p_1 (XEXP (x, 0), 0, size,
|
| 2335 |
|
|
GET_MODE (x), code_changed);
|
| 2336 |
|
|
}
|
| 2337 |
|
|
|
| 2338 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2339 |
|
|
|
| 2340 |
|
|
/* Division by a non-constant might trap. */
|
| 2341 |
|
|
case DIV:
|
| 2342 |
|
|
case MOD:
|
| 2343 |
|
|
case UDIV:
|
| 2344 |
|
|
case UMOD:
|
| 2345 |
|
|
if (HONOR_SNANS (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 2346 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2347 |
|
|
if (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 2348 |
|
|
return flag_trapping_math;
|
| 2349 |
|
|
if (!CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 1)) || (XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx))
|
| 2350 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2351 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2352 |
|
|
|
| 2353 |
|
|
case EXPR_LIST:
|
| 2354 |
|
|
/* An EXPR_LIST is used to represent a function call. This
|
| 2355 |
|
|
certainly may trap. */
|
| 2356 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2357 |
|
|
|
| 2358 |
|
|
case GE:
|
| 2359 |
|
|
case GT:
|
| 2360 |
|
|
case LE:
|
| 2361 |
|
|
case LT:
|
| 2362 |
|
|
case LTGT:
|
| 2363 |
|
|
case COMPARE:
|
| 2364 |
|
|
/* Some floating point comparisons may trap. */
|
| 2365 |
|
|
if (!flag_trapping_math)
|
| 2366 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2367 |
|
|
/* ??? There is no machine independent way to check for tests that trap
|
| 2368 |
|
|
when COMPARE is used, though many targets do make this distinction.
|
| 2369 |
|
|
For instance, sparc uses CCFPE for compares which generate exceptions
|
| 2370 |
|
|
and CCFP for compares which do not generate exceptions. */
|
| 2371 |
|
|
if (HONOR_NANS (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 2372 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2373 |
|
|
/* But often the compare has some CC mode, so check operand
|
| 2374 |
|
|
modes as well. */
|
| 2375 |
|
|
if (HONOR_NANS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
|
| 2376 |
|
|
|| HONOR_NANS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1))))
|
| 2377 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2378 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2379 |
|
|
|
| 2380 |
|
|
case EQ:
|
| 2381 |
|
|
case NE:
|
| 2382 |
|
|
if (HONOR_SNANS (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 2383 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2384 |
|
|
/* Often comparison is CC mode, so check operand modes. */
|
| 2385 |
|
|
if (HONOR_SNANS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
|
| 2386 |
|
|
|| HONOR_SNANS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1))))
|
| 2387 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2388 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2389 |
|
|
|
| 2390 |
|
|
case FIX:
|
| 2391 |
|
|
/* Conversion of floating point might trap. */
|
| 2392 |
|
|
if (flag_trapping_math && HONOR_NANS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
|
| 2393 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2394 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2395 |
|
|
|
| 2396 |
|
|
case NEG:
|
| 2397 |
|
|
case ABS:
|
| 2398 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
| 2399 |
|
|
/* These operations don't trap even with floating point. */
|
| 2400 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2401 |
|
|
|
| 2402 |
|
|
default:
|
| 2403 |
|
|
/* Any floating arithmetic may trap. */
|
| 2404 |
|
|
if (SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
|
| 2405 |
|
|
&& flag_trapping_math)
|
| 2406 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2407 |
|
|
}
|
| 2408 |
|
|
|
| 2409 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 2410 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 2411 |
|
|
{
|
| 2412 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 2413 |
|
|
{
|
| 2414 |
|
|
if (may_trap_p_1 (XEXP (x, i), flags))
|
| 2415 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2416 |
|
|
}
|
| 2417 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 2418 |
|
|
{
|
| 2419 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 2420 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
| 2421 |
|
|
if (may_trap_p_1 (XVECEXP (x, i, j), flags))
|
| 2422 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2423 |
|
|
}
|
| 2424 |
|
|
}
|
| 2425 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2426 |
|
|
}
|
| 2427 |
|
|
|
| 2428 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if evaluating rtx X might cause a trap. */
|
| 2429 |
|
|
|
| 2430 |
|
|
int
|
| 2431 |
|
|
may_trap_p (const_rtx x)
|
| 2432 |
|
|
{
|
| 2433 |
|
|
return may_trap_p_1 (x, 0);
|
| 2434 |
|
|
}
|
| 2435 |
|
|
|
| 2436 |
|
|
/* Same as above, but additionally return nonzero if evaluating rtx X might
|
| 2437 |
|
|
cause a fault. We define a fault for the purpose of this function as a
|
| 2438 |
|
|
erroneous execution condition that cannot be encountered during the normal
|
| 2439 |
|
|
execution of a valid program; the typical example is an unaligned memory
|
| 2440 |
|
|
access on a strict alignment machine. The compiler guarantees that it
|
| 2441 |
|
|
doesn't generate code that will fault from a valid program, but this
|
| 2442 |
|
|
guarantee doesn't mean anything for individual instructions. Consider
|
| 2443 |
|
|
the following example:
|
| 2444 |
|
|
|
| 2445 |
|
|
struct S { int d; union { char *cp; int *ip; }; };
|
| 2446 |
|
|
|
| 2447 |
|
|
int foo(struct S *s)
|
| 2448 |
|
|
{
|
| 2449 |
|
|
if (s->d == 1)
|
| 2450 |
|
|
return *s->ip;
|
| 2451 |
|
|
else
|
| 2452 |
|
|
return *s->cp;
|
| 2453 |
|
|
}
|
| 2454 |
|
|
|
| 2455 |
|
|
on a strict alignment machine. In a valid program, foo will never be
|
| 2456 |
|
|
invoked on a structure for which d is equal to 1 and the underlying
|
| 2457 |
|
|
unique field of the union not aligned on a 4-byte boundary, but the
|
| 2458 |
|
|
expression *s->ip might cause a fault if considered individually.
|
| 2459 |
|
|
|
| 2460 |
|
|
At the RTL level, potentially problematic expressions will almost always
|
| 2461 |
|
|
verify may_trap_p; for example, the above dereference can be emitted as
|
| 2462 |
|
|
(mem:SI (reg:P)) and this expression is may_trap_p for a generic register.
|
| 2463 |
|
|
However, suppose that foo is inlined in a caller that causes s->cp to
|
| 2464 |
|
|
point to a local character variable and guarantees that s->d is not set
|
| 2465 |
|
|
to 1; foo may have been effectively translated into pseudo-RTL as:
|
| 2466 |
|
|
|
| 2467 |
|
|
if ((reg:SI) == 1)
|
| 2468 |
|
|
(set (reg:SI) (mem:SI (%fp - 7)))
|
| 2469 |
|
|
else
|
| 2470 |
|
|
(set (reg:QI) (mem:QI (%fp - 7)))
|
| 2471 |
|
|
|
| 2472 |
|
|
Now (mem:SI (%fp - 7)) is considered as not may_trap_p since it is a
|
| 2473 |
|
|
memory reference to a stack slot, but it will certainly cause a fault
|
| 2474 |
|
|
on a strict alignment machine. */
|
| 2475 |
|
|
|
| 2476 |
|
|
int
|
| 2477 |
|
|
may_trap_or_fault_p (const_rtx x)
|
| 2478 |
|
|
{
|
| 2479 |
|
|
return may_trap_p_1 (x, 1);
|
| 2480 |
|
|
}
|
| 2481 |
|
|
|
| 2482 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if X contains a comparison that is not either EQ or NE,
|
| 2483 |
|
|
i.e., an inequality. */
|
| 2484 |
|
|
|
| 2485 |
|
|
int
|
| 2486 |
|
|
inequality_comparisons_p (const_rtx x)
|
| 2487 |
|
|
{
|
| 2488 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 2489 |
|
|
int len, i;
|
| 2490 |
|
|
const enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 2491 |
|
|
|
| 2492 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 2493 |
|
|
{
|
| 2494 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 2495 |
|
|
case SCRATCH:
|
| 2496 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 2497 |
|
|
case CC0:
|
| 2498 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 2499 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 2500 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 2501 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 2502 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 2503 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 2504 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 2505 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2506 |
|
|
|
| 2507 |
|
|
case LT:
|
| 2508 |
|
|
case LTU:
|
| 2509 |
|
|
case GT:
|
| 2510 |
|
|
case GTU:
|
| 2511 |
|
|
case LE:
|
| 2512 |
|
|
case LEU:
|
| 2513 |
|
|
case GE:
|
| 2514 |
|
|
case GEU:
|
| 2515 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2516 |
|
|
|
| 2517 |
|
|
default:
|
| 2518 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2519 |
|
|
}
|
| 2520 |
|
|
|
| 2521 |
|
|
len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code);
|
| 2522 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 2523 |
|
|
|
| 2524 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
|
| 2525 |
|
|
{
|
| 2526 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 2527 |
|
|
{
|
| 2528 |
|
|
if (inequality_comparisons_p (XEXP (x, i)))
|
| 2529 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2530 |
|
|
}
|
| 2531 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 2532 |
|
|
{
|
| 2533 |
|
|
int j;
|
| 2534 |
|
|
for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
|
| 2535 |
|
|
if (inequality_comparisons_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j)))
|
| 2536 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2537 |
|
|
}
|
| 2538 |
|
|
}
|
| 2539 |
|
|
|
| 2540 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2541 |
|
|
}
|
| 2542 |
|
|
|
| 2543 |
|
|
/* Replace any occurrence of FROM in X with TO. The function does
|
| 2544 |
|
|
not enter into CONST_DOUBLE for the replace.
|
| 2545 |
|
|
|
| 2546 |
|
|
Note that copying is not done so X must not be shared unless all copies
|
| 2547 |
|
|
are to be modified. */
|
| 2548 |
|
|
|
| 2549 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 2550 |
|
|
replace_rtx (rtx x, rtx from, rtx to)
|
| 2551 |
|
|
{
|
| 2552 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
| 2553 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 2554 |
|
|
|
| 2555 |
|
|
/* The following prevents loops occurrence when we change MEM in
|
| 2556 |
|
|
CONST_DOUBLE onto the same CONST_DOUBLE. */
|
| 2557 |
|
|
if (x != 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE)
|
| 2558 |
|
|
return x;
|
| 2559 |
|
|
|
| 2560 |
|
|
if (x == from)
|
| 2561 |
|
|
return to;
|
| 2562 |
|
|
|
| 2563 |
|
|
/* Allow this function to make replacements in EXPR_LISTs. */
|
| 2564 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
| 2565 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2566 |
|
|
|
| 2567 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
|
| 2568 |
|
|
{
|
| 2569 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = replace_rtx (SUBREG_REG (x), from, to);
|
| 2570 |
|
|
|
| 2571 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (new_rtx))
|
| 2572 |
|
|
{
|
| 2573 |
|
|
x = simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x), new_rtx,
|
| 2574 |
|
|
GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)),
|
| 2575 |
|
|
SUBREG_BYTE (x));
|
| 2576 |
|
|
gcc_assert (x);
|
| 2577 |
|
|
}
|
| 2578 |
|
|
else
|
| 2579 |
|
|
SUBREG_REG (x) = new_rtx;
|
| 2580 |
|
|
|
| 2581 |
|
|
return x;
|
| 2582 |
|
|
}
|
| 2583 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND)
|
| 2584 |
|
|
{
|
| 2585 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = replace_rtx (XEXP (x, 0), from, to);
|
| 2586 |
|
|
|
| 2587 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (new_rtx))
|
| 2588 |
|
|
{
|
| 2589 |
|
|
x = simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (x),
|
| 2590 |
|
|
new_rtx, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
|
| 2591 |
|
|
gcc_assert (x);
|
| 2592 |
|
|
}
|
| 2593 |
|
|
else
|
| 2594 |
|
|
XEXP (x, 0) = new_rtx;
|
| 2595 |
|
|
|
| 2596 |
|
|
return x;
|
| 2597 |
|
|
}
|
| 2598 |
|
|
|
| 2599 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x));
|
| 2600 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x)) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 2601 |
|
|
{
|
| 2602 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 2603 |
|
|
XEXP (x, i) = replace_rtx (XEXP (x, i), from, to);
|
| 2604 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 2605 |
|
|
for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
|
| 2606 |
|
|
XVECEXP (x, i, j) = replace_rtx (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from, to);
|
| 2607 |
|
|
}
|
| 2608 |
|
|
|
| 2609 |
|
|
return x;
|
| 2610 |
|
|
}
|
| 2611 |
|
|
|
| 2612 |
|
|
/* Replace occurrences of the old label in *X with the new one.
|
| 2613 |
|
|
DATA is a REPLACE_LABEL_DATA containing the old and new labels. */
|
| 2614 |
|
|
|
| 2615 |
|
|
int
|
| 2616 |
|
|
replace_label (rtx *x, void *data)
|
| 2617 |
|
|
{
|
| 2618 |
|
|
rtx l = *x;
|
| 2619 |
|
|
rtx old_label = ((replace_label_data *) data)->r1;
|
| 2620 |
|
|
rtx new_label = ((replace_label_data *) data)->r2;
|
| 2621 |
|
|
bool update_label_nuses = ((replace_label_data *) data)->update_label_nuses;
|
| 2622 |
|
|
|
| 2623 |
|
|
if (l == NULL_RTX)
|
| 2624 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2625 |
|
|
|
| 2626 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (l) == SYMBOL_REF
|
| 2627 |
|
|
&& CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (l))
|
| 2628 |
|
|
{
|
| 2629 |
|
|
rtx c = get_pool_constant (l);
|
| 2630 |
|
|
if (rtx_referenced_p (old_label, c))
|
| 2631 |
|
|
{
|
| 2632 |
|
|
rtx new_c, new_l;
|
| 2633 |
|
|
replace_label_data *d = (replace_label_data *) data;
|
| 2634 |
|
|
|
| 2635 |
|
|
/* Create a copy of constant C; replace the label inside
|
| 2636 |
|
|
but do not update LABEL_NUSES because uses in constant pool
|
| 2637 |
|
|
are not counted. */
|
| 2638 |
|
|
new_c = copy_rtx (c);
|
| 2639 |
|
|
d->update_label_nuses = false;
|
| 2640 |
|
|
for_each_rtx (&new_c, replace_label, data);
|
| 2641 |
|
|
d->update_label_nuses = update_label_nuses;
|
| 2642 |
|
|
|
| 2643 |
|
|
/* Add the new constant NEW_C to constant pool and replace
|
| 2644 |
|
|
the old reference to constant by new reference. */
|
| 2645 |
|
|
new_l = XEXP (force_const_mem (get_pool_mode (l), new_c), 0);
|
| 2646 |
|
|
*x = replace_rtx (l, l, new_l);
|
| 2647 |
|
|
}
|
| 2648 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2649 |
|
|
}
|
| 2650 |
|
|
|
| 2651 |
|
|
/* If this is a JUMP_INSN, then we also need to fix the JUMP_LABEL
|
| 2652 |
|
|
field. This is not handled by for_each_rtx because it doesn't
|
| 2653 |
|
|
handle unprinted ('0') fields. */
|
| 2654 |
|
|
if (JUMP_P (l) && JUMP_LABEL (l) == old_label)
|
| 2655 |
|
|
JUMP_LABEL (l) = new_label;
|
| 2656 |
|
|
|
| 2657 |
|
|
if ((GET_CODE (l) == LABEL_REF
|
| 2658 |
|
|
|| GET_CODE (l) == INSN_LIST)
|
| 2659 |
|
|
&& XEXP (l, 0) == old_label)
|
| 2660 |
|
|
{
|
| 2661 |
|
|
XEXP (l, 0) = new_label;
|
| 2662 |
|
|
if (update_label_nuses)
|
| 2663 |
|
|
{
|
| 2664 |
|
|
++LABEL_NUSES (new_label);
|
| 2665 |
|
|
--LABEL_NUSES (old_label);
|
| 2666 |
|
|
}
|
| 2667 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2668 |
|
|
}
|
| 2669 |
|
|
|
| 2670 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2671 |
|
|
}
|
| 2672 |
|
|
|
| 2673 |
|
|
/* When *BODY is equal to X or X is directly referenced by *BODY
|
| 2674 |
|
|
return nonzero, thus FOR_EACH_RTX stops traversing and returns nonzero
|
| 2675 |
|
|
too, otherwise FOR_EACH_RTX continues traversing *BODY. */
|
| 2676 |
|
|
|
| 2677 |
|
|
static int
|
| 2678 |
|
|
rtx_referenced_p_1 (rtx *body, void *x)
|
| 2679 |
|
|
{
|
| 2680 |
|
|
rtx y = (rtx) x;
|
| 2681 |
|
|
|
| 2682 |
|
|
if (*body == NULL_RTX)
|
| 2683 |
|
|
return y == NULL_RTX;
|
| 2684 |
|
|
|
| 2685 |
|
|
/* Return true if a label_ref *BODY refers to label Y. */
|
| 2686 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (*body) == LABEL_REF && LABEL_P (y))
|
| 2687 |
|
|
return XEXP (*body, 0) == y;
|
| 2688 |
|
|
|
| 2689 |
|
|
/* If *BODY is a reference to pool constant traverse the constant. */
|
| 2690 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (*body) == SYMBOL_REF
|
| 2691 |
|
|
&& CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (*body))
|
| 2692 |
|
|
return rtx_referenced_p (y, get_pool_constant (*body));
|
| 2693 |
|
|
|
| 2694 |
|
|
/* By default, compare the RTL expressions. */
|
| 2695 |
|
|
return rtx_equal_p (*body, y);
|
| 2696 |
|
|
}
|
| 2697 |
|
|
|
| 2698 |
|
|
/* Return true if X is referenced in BODY. */
|
| 2699 |
|
|
|
| 2700 |
|
|
int
|
| 2701 |
|
|
rtx_referenced_p (rtx x, rtx body)
|
| 2702 |
|
|
{
|
| 2703 |
|
|
return for_each_rtx (&body, rtx_referenced_p_1, x);
|
| 2704 |
|
|
}
|
| 2705 |
|
|
|
| 2706 |
|
|
/* If INSN is a tablejump return true and store the label (before jump table) to
|
| 2707 |
|
|
*LABELP and the jump table to *TABLEP. LABELP and TABLEP may be NULL. */
|
| 2708 |
|
|
|
| 2709 |
|
|
bool
|
| 2710 |
|
|
tablejump_p (const_rtx insn, rtx *labelp, rtx *tablep)
|
| 2711 |
|
|
{
|
| 2712 |
|
|
rtx label, table;
|
| 2713 |
|
|
|
| 2714 |
|
|
if (!JUMP_P (insn))
|
| 2715 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 2716 |
|
|
|
| 2717 |
|
|
label = JUMP_LABEL (insn);
|
| 2718 |
|
|
if (label != NULL_RTX && !ANY_RETURN_P (label)
|
| 2719 |
|
|
&& (table = next_active_insn (label)) != NULL_RTX
|
| 2720 |
|
|
&& JUMP_TABLE_DATA_P (table))
|
| 2721 |
|
|
{
|
| 2722 |
|
|
if (labelp)
|
| 2723 |
|
|
*labelp = label;
|
| 2724 |
|
|
if (tablep)
|
| 2725 |
|
|
*tablep = table;
|
| 2726 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 2727 |
|
|
}
|
| 2728 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 2729 |
|
|
}
|
| 2730 |
|
|
|
| 2731 |
|
|
/* A subroutine of computed_jump_p, return 1 if X contains a REG or MEM or
|
| 2732 |
|
|
constant that is not in the constant pool and not in the condition
|
| 2733 |
|
|
of an IF_THEN_ELSE. */
|
| 2734 |
|
|
|
| 2735 |
|
|
static int
|
| 2736 |
|
|
computed_jump_p_1 (const_rtx x)
|
| 2737 |
|
|
{
|
| 2738 |
|
|
const enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 2739 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
| 2740 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 2741 |
|
|
|
| 2742 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 2743 |
|
|
{
|
| 2744 |
|
|
case LABEL_REF:
|
| 2745 |
|
|
case PC:
|
| 2746 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2747 |
|
|
|
| 2748 |
|
|
case CONST:
|
| 2749 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 2750 |
|
|
case CONST_DOUBLE:
|
| 2751 |
|
|
case CONST_FIXED:
|
| 2752 |
|
|
case CONST_VECTOR:
|
| 2753 |
|
|
case SYMBOL_REF:
|
| 2754 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 2755 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2756 |
|
|
|
| 2757 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 2758 |
|
|
return ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
|
| 2759 |
|
|
&& CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 0)));
|
| 2760 |
|
|
|
| 2761 |
|
|
case IF_THEN_ELSE:
|
| 2762 |
|
|
return (computed_jump_p_1 (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 2763 |
|
|
|| computed_jump_p_1 (XEXP (x, 2)));
|
| 2764 |
|
|
|
| 2765 |
|
|
default:
|
| 2766 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2767 |
|
|
}
|
| 2768 |
|
|
|
| 2769 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 2770 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 2771 |
|
|
{
|
| 2772 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e'
|
| 2773 |
|
|
&& computed_jump_p_1 (XEXP (x, i)))
|
| 2774 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2775 |
|
|
|
| 2776 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 2777 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
| 2778 |
|
|
if (computed_jump_p_1 (XVECEXP (x, i, j)))
|
| 2779 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2780 |
|
|
}
|
| 2781 |
|
|
|
| 2782 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2783 |
|
|
}
|
| 2784 |
|
|
|
| 2785 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if INSN is an indirect jump (aka computed jump).
|
| 2786 |
|
|
|
| 2787 |
|
|
Tablejumps and casesi insns are not considered indirect jumps;
|
| 2788 |
|
|
we can recognize them by a (use (label_ref)). */
|
| 2789 |
|
|
|
| 2790 |
|
|
int
|
| 2791 |
|
|
computed_jump_p (const_rtx insn)
|
| 2792 |
|
|
{
|
| 2793 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 2794 |
|
|
if (JUMP_P (insn))
|
| 2795 |
|
|
{
|
| 2796 |
|
|
rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
|
| 2797 |
|
|
|
| 2798 |
|
|
/* If we have a JUMP_LABEL set, we're not a computed jump. */
|
| 2799 |
|
|
if (JUMP_LABEL (insn) != NULL)
|
| 2800 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2801 |
|
|
|
| 2802 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
|
| 2803 |
|
|
{
|
| 2804 |
|
|
int len = XVECLEN (pat, 0);
|
| 2805 |
|
|
int has_use_labelref = 0;
|
| 2806 |
|
|
|
| 2807 |
|
|
for (i = len - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 2808 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) == USE
|
| 2809 |
|
|
&& (GET_CODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i), 0))
|
| 2810 |
|
|
== LABEL_REF))
|
| 2811 |
|
|
has_use_labelref = 1;
|
| 2812 |
|
|
|
| 2813 |
|
|
if (! has_use_labelref)
|
| 2814 |
|
|
for (i = len - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 2815 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) == SET
|
| 2816 |
|
|
&& SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) == pc_rtx
|
| 2817 |
|
|
&& computed_jump_p_1 (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i))))
|
| 2818 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2819 |
|
|
}
|
| 2820 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET
|
| 2821 |
|
|
&& SET_DEST (pat) == pc_rtx
|
| 2822 |
|
|
&& computed_jump_p_1 (SET_SRC (pat)))
|
| 2823 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 2824 |
|
|
}
|
| 2825 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2826 |
|
|
}
|
| 2827 |
|
|
|
| 2828 |
|
|
/* Optimized loop of for_each_rtx, trying to avoid useless recursive
|
| 2829 |
|
|
calls. Processes the subexpressions of EXP and passes them to F. */
|
| 2830 |
|
|
static int
|
| 2831 |
|
|
for_each_rtx_1 (rtx exp, int n, rtx_function f, void *data)
|
| 2832 |
|
|
{
|
| 2833 |
|
|
int result, i, j;
|
| 2834 |
|
|
const char *format = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (exp));
|
| 2835 |
|
|
rtx *x;
|
| 2836 |
|
|
|
| 2837 |
|
|
for (; format[n] != '\0'; n++)
|
| 2838 |
|
|
{
|
| 2839 |
|
|
switch (format[n])
|
| 2840 |
|
|
{
|
| 2841 |
|
|
case 'e':
|
| 2842 |
|
|
/* Call F on X. */
|
| 2843 |
|
|
x = &XEXP (exp, n);
|
| 2844 |
|
|
result = (*f) (x, data);
|
| 2845 |
|
|
if (result == -1)
|
| 2846 |
|
|
/* Do not traverse sub-expressions. */
|
| 2847 |
|
|
continue;
|
| 2848 |
|
|
else if (result != 0)
|
| 2849 |
|
|
/* Stop the traversal. */
|
| 2850 |
|
|
return result;
|
| 2851 |
|
|
|
| 2852 |
|
|
if (*x == NULL_RTX)
|
| 2853 |
|
|
/* There are no sub-expressions. */
|
| 2854 |
|
|
continue;
|
| 2855 |
|
|
|
| 2856 |
|
|
i = non_rtx_starting_operands[GET_CODE (*x)];
|
| 2857 |
|
|
if (i >= 0)
|
| 2858 |
|
|
{
|
| 2859 |
|
|
result = for_each_rtx_1 (*x, i, f, data);
|
| 2860 |
|
|
if (result != 0)
|
| 2861 |
|
|
return result;
|
| 2862 |
|
|
}
|
| 2863 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2864 |
|
|
|
| 2865 |
|
|
case 'V':
|
| 2866 |
|
|
case 'E':
|
| 2867 |
|
|
if (XVEC (exp, n) == 0)
|
| 2868 |
|
|
continue;
|
| 2869 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (exp, n); ++j)
|
| 2870 |
|
|
{
|
| 2871 |
|
|
/* Call F on X. */
|
| 2872 |
|
|
x = &XVECEXP (exp, n, j);
|
| 2873 |
|
|
result = (*f) (x, data);
|
| 2874 |
|
|
if (result == -1)
|
| 2875 |
|
|
/* Do not traverse sub-expressions. */
|
| 2876 |
|
|
continue;
|
| 2877 |
|
|
else if (result != 0)
|
| 2878 |
|
|
/* Stop the traversal. */
|
| 2879 |
|
|
return result;
|
| 2880 |
|
|
|
| 2881 |
|
|
if (*x == NULL_RTX)
|
| 2882 |
|
|
/* There are no sub-expressions. */
|
| 2883 |
|
|
continue;
|
| 2884 |
|
|
|
| 2885 |
|
|
i = non_rtx_starting_operands[GET_CODE (*x)];
|
| 2886 |
|
|
if (i >= 0)
|
| 2887 |
|
|
{
|
| 2888 |
|
|
result = for_each_rtx_1 (*x, i, f, data);
|
| 2889 |
|
|
if (result != 0)
|
| 2890 |
|
|
return result;
|
| 2891 |
|
|
}
|
| 2892 |
|
|
}
|
| 2893 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2894 |
|
|
|
| 2895 |
|
|
default:
|
| 2896 |
|
|
/* Nothing to do. */
|
| 2897 |
|
|
break;
|
| 2898 |
|
|
}
|
| 2899 |
|
|
}
|
| 2900 |
|
|
|
| 2901 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2902 |
|
|
}
|
| 2903 |
|
|
|
| 2904 |
|
|
/* Traverse X via depth-first search, calling F for each
|
| 2905 |
|
|
sub-expression (including X itself). F is also passed the DATA.
|
| 2906 |
|
|
If F returns -1, do not traverse sub-expressions, but continue
|
| 2907 |
|
|
traversing the rest of the tree. If F ever returns any other
|
| 2908 |
|
|
nonzero value, stop the traversal, and return the value returned
|
| 2909 |
|
|
by F. Otherwise, return 0. This function does not traverse inside
|
| 2910 |
|
|
tree structure that contains RTX_EXPRs, or into sub-expressions
|
| 2911 |
|
|
whose format code is `0' since it is not known whether or not those
|
| 2912 |
|
|
codes are actually RTL.
|
| 2913 |
|
|
|
| 2914 |
|
|
This routine is very general, and could (should?) be used to
|
| 2915 |
|
|
implement many of the other routines in this file. */
|
| 2916 |
|
|
|
| 2917 |
|
|
int
|
| 2918 |
|
|
for_each_rtx (rtx *x, rtx_function f, void *data)
|
| 2919 |
|
|
{
|
| 2920 |
|
|
int result;
|
| 2921 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 2922 |
|
|
|
| 2923 |
|
|
/* Call F on X. */
|
| 2924 |
|
|
result = (*f) (x, data);
|
| 2925 |
|
|
if (result == -1)
|
| 2926 |
|
|
/* Do not traverse sub-expressions. */
|
| 2927 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2928 |
|
|
else if (result != 0)
|
| 2929 |
|
|
/* Stop the traversal. */
|
| 2930 |
|
|
return result;
|
| 2931 |
|
|
|
| 2932 |
|
|
if (*x == NULL_RTX)
|
| 2933 |
|
|
/* There are no sub-expressions. */
|
| 2934 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2935 |
|
|
|
| 2936 |
|
|
i = non_rtx_starting_operands[GET_CODE (*x)];
|
| 2937 |
|
|
if (i < 0)
|
| 2938 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 2939 |
|
|
|
| 2940 |
|
|
return for_each_rtx_1 (*x, i, f, data);
|
| 2941 |
|
|
}
|
| 2942 |
|
|
|
| 2943 |
|
|
|
| 2944 |
|
|
|
| 2945 |
|
|
/* Data structure that holds the internal state communicated between
|
| 2946 |
|
|
for_each_inc_dec, for_each_inc_dec_find_mem and
|
| 2947 |
|
|
for_each_inc_dec_find_inc_dec. */
|
| 2948 |
|
|
|
| 2949 |
|
|
struct for_each_inc_dec_ops {
|
| 2950 |
|
|
/* The function to be called for each autoinc operation found. */
|
| 2951 |
|
|
for_each_inc_dec_fn fn;
|
| 2952 |
|
|
/* The opaque argument to be passed to it. */
|
| 2953 |
|
|
void *arg;
|
| 2954 |
|
|
/* The MEM we're visiting, if any. */
|
| 2955 |
|
|
rtx mem;
|
| 2956 |
|
|
};
|
| 2957 |
|
|
|
| 2958 |
|
|
static int for_each_inc_dec_find_mem (rtx *r, void *d);
|
| 2959 |
|
|
|
| 2960 |
|
|
/* Find PRE/POST-INC/DEC/MODIFY operations within *R, extract the
|
| 2961 |
|
|
operands of the equivalent add insn and pass the result to the
|
| 2962 |
|
|
operator specified by *D. */
|
| 2963 |
|
|
|
| 2964 |
|
|
static int
|
| 2965 |
|
|
for_each_inc_dec_find_inc_dec (rtx *r, void *d)
|
| 2966 |
|
|
{
|
| 2967 |
|
|
rtx x = *r;
|
| 2968 |
|
|
struct for_each_inc_dec_ops *data = (struct for_each_inc_dec_ops *)d;
|
| 2969 |
|
|
|
| 2970 |
|
|
switch (GET_CODE (x))
|
| 2971 |
|
|
{
|
| 2972 |
|
|
case PRE_INC:
|
| 2973 |
|
|
case POST_INC:
|
| 2974 |
|
|
{
|
| 2975 |
|
|
int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (data->mem));
|
| 2976 |
|
|
rtx r1 = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 2977 |
|
|
rtx c = gen_int_mode (size, GET_MODE (r1));
|
| 2978 |
|
|
return data->fn (data->mem, x, r1, r1, c, data->arg);
|
| 2979 |
|
|
}
|
| 2980 |
|
|
|
| 2981 |
|
|
case PRE_DEC:
|
| 2982 |
|
|
case POST_DEC:
|
| 2983 |
|
|
{
|
| 2984 |
|
|
int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (data->mem));
|
| 2985 |
|
|
rtx r1 = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 2986 |
|
|
rtx c = gen_int_mode (-size, GET_MODE (r1));
|
| 2987 |
|
|
return data->fn (data->mem, x, r1, r1, c, data->arg);
|
| 2988 |
|
|
}
|
| 2989 |
|
|
|
| 2990 |
|
|
case PRE_MODIFY:
|
| 2991 |
|
|
case POST_MODIFY:
|
| 2992 |
|
|
{
|
| 2993 |
|
|
rtx r1 = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 2994 |
|
|
rtx add = XEXP (x, 1);
|
| 2995 |
|
|
return data->fn (data->mem, x, r1, add, NULL, data->arg);
|
| 2996 |
|
|
}
|
| 2997 |
|
|
|
| 2998 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 2999 |
|
|
{
|
| 3000 |
|
|
rtx save = data->mem;
|
| 3001 |
|
|
int ret = for_each_inc_dec_find_mem (r, d);
|
| 3002 |
|
|
data->mem = save;
|
| 3003 |
|
|
return ret;
|
| 3004 |
|
|
}
|
| 3005 |
|
|
|
| 3006 |
|
|
default:
|
| 3007 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 3008 |
|
|
}
|
| 3009 |
|
|
}
|
| 3010 |
|
|
|
| 3011 |
|
|
/* If *R is a MEM, find PRE/POST-INC/DEC/MODIFY operations within its
|
| 3012 |
|
|
address, extract the operands of the equivalent add insn and pass
|
| 3013 |
|
|
the result to the operator specified by *D. */
|
| 3014 |
|
|
|
| 3015 |
|
|
static int
|
| 3016 |
|
|
for_each_inc_dec_find_mem (rtx *r, void *d)
|
| 3017 |
|
|
{
|
| 3018 |
|
|
rtx x = *r;
|
| 3019 |
|
|
if (x != NULL_RTX && MEM_P (x))
|
| 3020 |
|
|
{
|
| 3021 |
|
|
struct for_each_inc_dec_ops *data = (struct for_each_inc_dec_ops *) d;
|
| 3022 |
|
|
int result;
|
| 3023 |
|
|
|
| 3024 |
|
|
data->mem = x;
|
| 3025 |
|
|
|
| 3026 |
|
|
result = for_each_rtx (&XEXP (x, 0), for_each_inc_dec_find_inc_dec,
|
| 3027 |
|
|
data);
|
| 3028 |
|
|
if (result)
|
| 3029 |
|
|
return result;
|
| 3030 |
|
|
|
| 3031 |
|
|
return -1;
|
| 3032 |
|
|
}
|
| 3033 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 3034 |
|
|
}
|
| 3035 |
|
|
|
| 3036 |
|
|
/* Traverse *X looking for MEMs, and for autoinc operations within
|
| 3037 |
|
|
them. For each such autoinc operation found, call FN, passing it
|
| 3038 |
|
|
the innermost enclosing MEM, the operation itself, the RTX modified
|
| 3039 |
|
|
by the operation, two RTXs (the second may be NULL) that, once
|
| 3040 |
|
|
added, represent the value to be held by the modified RTX
|
| 3041 |
|
|
afterwards, and ARG. FN is to return -1 to skip looking for other
|
| 3042 |
|
|
autoinc operations within the visited operation, 0 to continue the
|
| 3043 |
|
|
traversal, or any other value to have it returned to the caller of
|
| 3044 |
|
|
for_each_inc_dec. */
|
| 3045 |
|
|
|
| 3046 |
|
|
int
|
| 3047 |
|
|
for_each_inc_dec (rtx *x,
|
| 3048 |
|
|
for_each_inc_dec_fn fn,
|
| 3049 |
|
|
void *arg)
|
| 3050 |
|
|
{
|
| 3051 |
|
|
struct for_each_inc_dec_ops data;
|
| 3052 |
|
|
|
| 3053 |
|
|
data.fn = fn;
|
| 3054 |
|
|
data.arg = arg;
|
| 3055 |
|
|
data.mem = NULL;
|
| 3056 |
|
|
|
| 3057 |
|
|
return for_each_rtx (x, for_each_inc_dec_find_mem, &data);
|
| 3058 |
|
|
}
|
| 3059 |
|
|
|
| 3060 |
|
|
|
| 3061 |
|
|
/* Searches X for any reference to REGNO, returning the rtx of the
|
| 3062 |
|
|
reference found if any. Otherwise, returns NULL_RTX. */
|
| 3063 |
|
|
|
| 3064 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 3065 |
|
|
regno_use_in (unsigned int regno, rtx x)
|
| 3066 |
|
|
{
|
| 3067 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 3068 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
| 3069 |
|
|
rtx tem;
|
| 3070 |
|
|
|
| 3071 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) == regno)
|
| 3072 |
|
|
return x;
|
| 3073 |
|
|
|
| 3074 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x));
|
| 3075 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x)) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 3076 |
|
|
{
|
| 3077 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 3078 |
|
|
{
|
| 3079 |
|
|
if ((tem = regno_use_in (regno, XEXP (x, i))))
|
| 3080 |
|
|
return tem;
|
| 3081 |
|
|
}
|
| 3082 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 3083 |
|
|
for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
|
| 3084 |
|
|
if ((tem = regno_use_in (regno , XVECEXP (x, i, j))))
|
| 3085 |
|
|
return tem;
|
| 3086 |
|
|
}
|
| 3087 |
|
|
|
| 3088 |
|
|
return NULL_RTX;
|
| 3089 |
|
|
}
|
| 3090 |
|
|
|
| 3091 |
|
|
/* Return a value indicating whether OP, an operand of a commutative
|
| 3092 |
|
|
operation, is preferred as the first or second operand. The higher
|
| 3093 |
|
|
the value, the stronger the preference for being the first operand.
|
| 3094 |
|
|
We use negative values to indicate a preference for the first operand
|
| 3095 |
|
|
and positive values for the second operand. */
|
| 3096 |
|
|
|
| 3097 |
|
|
int
|
| 3098 |
|
|
commutative_operand_precedence (rtx op)
|
| 3099 |
|
|
{
|
| 3100 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
|
| 3101 |
|
|
|
| 3102 |
|
|
/* Constants always come the second operand. Prefer "nice" constants. */
|
| 3103 |
|
|
if (code == CONST_INT)
|
| 3104 |
|
|
return -8;
|
| 3105 |
|
|
if (code == CONST_DOUBLE)
|
| 3106 |
|
|
return -7;
|
| 3107 |
|
|
if (code == CONST_FIXED)
|
| 3108 |
|
|
return -7;
|
| 3109 |
|
|
op = avoid_constant_pool_reference (op);
|
| 3110 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (op);
|
| 3111 |
|
|
|
| 3112 |
|
|
switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
|
| 3113 |
|
|
{
|
| 3114 |
|
|
case RTX_CONST_OBJ:
|
| 3115 |
|
|
if (code == CONST_INT)
|
| 3116 |
|
|
return -6;
|
| 3117 |
|
|
if (code == CONST_DOUBLE)
|
| 3118 |
|
|
return -5;
|
| 3119 |
|
|
if (code == CONST_FIXED)
|
| 3120 |
|
|
return -5;
|
| 3121 |
|
|
return -4;
|
| 3122 |
|
|
|
| 3123 |
|
|
case RTX_EXTRA:
|
| 3124 |
|
|
/* SUBREGs of objects should come second. */
|
| 3125 |
|
|
if (code == SUBREG && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (op)))
|
| 3126 |
|
|
return -3;
|
| 3127 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 3128 |
|
|
|
| 3129 |
|
|
case RTX_OBJ:
|
| 3130 |
|
|
/* Complex expressions should be the first, so decrease priority
|
| 3131 |
|
|
of objects. Prefer pointer objects over non pointer objects. */
|
| 3132 |
|
|
if ((REG_P (op) && REG_POINTER (op))
|
| 3133 |
|
|
|| (MEM_P (op) && MEM_POINTER (op)))
|
| 3134 |
|
|
return -1;
|
| 3135 |
|
|
return -2;
|
| 3136 |
|
|
|
| 3137 |
|
|
case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
|
| 3138 |
|
|
/* Prefer operands that are themselves commutative to be first.
|
| 3139 |
|
|
This helps to make things linear. In particular,
|
| 3140 |
|
|
(and (and (reg) (reg)) (not (reg))) is canonical. */
|
| 3141 |
|
|
return 4;
|
| 3142 |
|
|
|
| 3143 |
|
|
case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
|
| 3144 |
|
|
/* If only one operand is a binary expression, it will be the first
|
| 3145 |
|
|
operand. In particular, (plus (minus (reg) (reg)) (neg (reg)))
|
| 3146 |
|
|
is canonical, although it will usually be further simplified. */
|
| 3147 |
|
|
return 2;
|
| 3148 |
|
|
|
| 3149 |
|
|
case RTX_UNARY:
|
| 3150 |
|
|
/* Then prefer NEG and NOT. */
|
| 3151 |
|
|
if (code == NEG || code == NOT)
|
| 3152 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 3153 |
|
|
|
| 3154 |
|
|
default:
|
| 3155 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 3156 |
|
|
}
|
| 3157 |
|
|
}
|
| 3158 |
|
|
|
| 3159 |
|
|
/* Return 1 iff it is necessary to swap operands of commutative operation
|
| 3160 |
|
|
in order to canonicalize expression. */
|
| 3161 |
|
|
|
| 3162 |
|
|
bool
|
| 3163 |
|
|
swap_commutative_operands_p (rtx x, rtx y)
|
| 3164 |
|
|
{
|
| 3165 |
|
|
return (commutative_operand_precedence (x)
|
| 3166 |
|
|
< commutative_operand_precedence (y));
|
| 3167 |
|
|
}
|
| 3168 |
|
|
|
| 3169 |
|
|
/* Return 1 if X is an autoincrement side effect and the register is
|
| 3170 |
|
|
not the stack pointer. */
|
| 3171 |
|
|
int
|
| 3172 |
|
|
auto_inc_p (const_rtx x)
|
| 3173 |
|
|
{
|
| 3174 |
|
|
switch (GET_CODE (x))
|
| 3175 |
|
|
{
|
| 3176 |
|
|
case PRE_INC:
|
| 3177 |
|
|
case POST_INC:
|
| 3178 |
|
|
case PRE_DEC:
|
| 3179 |
|
|
case POST_DEC:
|
| 3180 |
|
|
case PRE_MODIFY:
|
| 3181 |
|
|
case POST_MODIFY:
|
| 3182 |
|
|
/* There are no REG_INC notes for SP. */
|
| 3183 |
|
|
if (XEXP (x, 0) != stack_pointer_rtx)
|
| 3184 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 3185 |
|
|
default:
|
| 3186 |
|
|
break;
|
| 3187 |
|
|
}
|
| 3188 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 3189 |
|
|
}
|
| 3190 |
|
|
|
| 3191 |
|
|
/* Return nonzero if IN contains a piece of rtl that has the address LOC. */
|
| 3192 |
|
|
int
|
| 3193 |
|
|
loc_mentioned_in_p (rtx *loc, const_rtx in)
|
| 3194 |
|
|
{
|
| 3195 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
| 3196 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 3197 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
| 3198 |
|
|
|
| 3199 |
|
|
if (!in)
|
| 3200 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 3201 |
|
|
|
| 3202 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (in);
|
| 3203 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 3204 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 3205 |
|
|
{
|
| 3206 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 3207 |
|
|
{
|
| 3208 |
|
|
if (loc == &XEXP (in, i) || loc_mentioned_in_p (loc, XEXP (in, i)))
|
| 3209 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 3210 |
|
|
}
|
| 3211 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 3212 |
|
|
for (j = XVECLEN (in, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
|
| 3213 |
|
|
if (loc == &XVECEXP (in, i, j)
|
| 3214 |
|
|
|| loc_mentioned_in_p (loc, XVECEXP (in, i, j)))
|
| 3215 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 3216 |
|
|
}
|
| 3217 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 3218 |
|
|
}
|
| 3219 |
|
|
|
| 3220 |
|
|
/* Helper function for subreg_lsb. Given a subreg's OUTER_MODE, INNER_MODE,
|
| 3221 |
|
|
and SUBREG_BYTE, return the bit offset where the subreg begins
|
| 3222 |
|
|
(counting from the least significant bit of the operand). */
|
| 3223 |
|
|
|
| 3224 |
|
|
unsigned int
|
| 3225 |
|
|
subreg_lsb_1 (enum machine_mode outer_mode,
|
| 3226 |
|
|
enum machine_mode inner_mode,
|
| 3227 |
|
|
unsigned int subreg_byte)
|
| 3228 |
|
|
{
|
| 3229 |
|
|
unsigned int bitpos;
|
| 3230 |
|
|
unsigned int byte;
|
| 3231 |
|
|
unsigned int word;
|
| 3232 |
|
|
|
| 3233 |
|
|
/* A paradoxical subreg begins at bit position 0. */
|
| 3234 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (outer_mode) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode))
|
| 3235 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 3236 |
|
|
|
| 3237 |
|
|
if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN != BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
|
| 3238 |
|
|
/* If the subreg crosses a word boundary ensure that
|
| 3239 |
|
|
it also begins and ends on a word boundary. */
|
| 3240 |
|
|
gcc_assert (!((subreg_byte % UNITS_PER_WORD
|
| 3241 |
|
|
+ GET_MODE_SIZE (outer_mode)) > UNITS_PER_WORD
|
| 3242 |
|
|
&& (subreg_byte % UNITS_PER_WORD
|
| 3243 |
|
|
|| GET_MODE_SIZE (outer_mode) % UNITS_PER_WORD)));
|
| 3244 |
|
|
|
| 3245 |
|
|
if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
|
| 3246 |
|
|
word = (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
|
| 3247 |
|
|
- (subreg_byte + GET_MODE_SIZE (outer_mode))) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
|
| 3248 |
|
|
else
|
| 3249 |
|
|
word = subreg_byte / UNITS_PER_WORD;
|
| 3250 |
|
|
bitpos = word * BITS_PER_WORD;
|
| 3251 |
|
|
|
| 3252 |
|
|
if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
|
| 3253 |
|
|
byte = (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
|
| 3254 |
|
|
- (subreg_byte + GET_MODE_SIZE (outer_mode))) % UNITS_PER_WORD;
|
| 3255 |
|
|
else
|
| 3256 |
|
|
byte = subreg_byte % UNITS_PER_WORD;
|
| 3257 |
|
|
bitpos += byte * BITS_PER_UNIT;
|
| 3258 |
|
|
|
| 3259 |
|
|
return bitpos;
|
| 3260 |
|
|
}
|
| 3261 |
|
|
|
| 3262 |
|
|
/* Given a subreg X, return the bit offset where the subreg begins
|
| 3263 |
|
|
(counting from the least significant bit of the reg). */
|
| 3264 |
|
|
|
| 3265 |
|
|
unsigned int
|
| 3266 |
|
|
subreg_lsb (const_rtx x)
|
| 3267 |
|
|
{
|
| 3268 |
|
|
return subreg_lsb_1 (GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)),
|
| 3269 |
|
|
SUBREG_BYTE (x));
|
| 3270 |
|
|
}
|
| 3271 |
|
|
|
| 3272 |
|
|
/* Fill in information about a subreg of a hard register.
|
| 3273 |
|
|
xregno - A regno of an inner hard subreg_reg (or what will become one).
|
| 3274 |
|
|
xmode - The mode of xregno.
|
| 3275 |
|
|
offset - The byte offset.
|
| 3276 |
|
|
ymode - The mode of a top level SUBREG (or what may become one).
|
| 3277 |
|
|
info - Pointer to structure to fill in. */
|
| 3278 |
|
|
void
|
| 3279 |
|
|
subreg_get_info (unsigned int xregno, enum machine_mode xmode,
|
| 3280 |
|
|
unsigned int offset, enum machine_mode ymode,
|
| 3281 |
|
|
struct subreg_info *info)
|
| 3282 |
|
|
{
|
| 3283 |
|
|
int nregs_xmode, nregs_ymode;
|
| 3284 |
|
|
int mode_multiple, nregs_multiple;
|
| 3285 |
|
|
int offset_adj, y_offset, y_offset_adj;
|
| 3286 |
|
|
int regsize_xmode, regsize_ymode;
|
| 3287 |
|
|
bool rknown;
|
| 3288 |
|
|
|
| 3289 |
|
|
gcc_assert (xregno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER);
|
| 3290 |
|
|
|
| 3291 |
|
|
rknown = false;
|
| 3292 |
|
|
|
| 3293 |
|
|
/* If there are holes in a non-scalar mode in registers, we expect
|
| 3294 |
|
|
that it is made up of its units concatenated together. */
|
| 3295 |
|
|
if (HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (xregno, xmode))
|
| 3296 |
|
|
{
|
| 3297 |
|
|
enum machine_mode xmode_unit;
|
| 3298 |
|
|
|
| 3299 |
|
|
nregs_xmode = HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (xregno, xmode);
|
| 3300 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_INNER (xmode) == VOIDmode)
|
| 3301 |
|
|
xmode_unit = xmode;
|
| 3302 |
|
|
else
|
| 3303 |
|
|
xmode_unit = GET_MODE_INNER (xmode);
|
| 3304 |
|
|
gcc_assert (HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (xregno, xmode_unit));
|
| 3305 |
|
|
gcc_assert (nregs_xmode
|
| 3306 |
|
|
== (GET_MODE_NUNITS (xmode)
|
| 3307 |
|
|
* HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (xregno, xmode_unit)));
|
| 3308 |
|
|
gcc_assert (hard_regno_nregs[xregno][xmode]
|
| 3309 |
|
|
== (hard_regno_nregs[xregno][xmode_unit]
|
| 3310 |
|
|
* GET_MODE_NUNITS (xmode)));
|
| 3311 |
|
|
|
| 3312 |
|
|
/* You can only ask for a SUBREG of a value with holes in the middle
|
| 3313 |
|
|
if you don't cross the holes. (Such a SUBREG should be done by
|
| 3314 |
|
|
picking a different register class, or doing it in memory if
|
| 3315 |
|
|
necessary.) An example of a value with holes is XCmode on 32-bit
|
| 3316 |
|
|
x86 with -m128bit-long-double; it's represented in 6 32-bit registers,
|
| 3317 |
|
|
3 for each part, but in memory it's two 128-bit parts.
|
| 3318 |
|
|
Padding is assumed to be at the end (not necessarily the 'high part')
|
| 3319 |
|
|
of each unit. */
|
| 3320 |
|
|
if ((offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (xmode_unit) + 1
|
| 3321 |
|
|
< GET_MODE_NUNITS (xmode))
|
| 3322 |
|
|
&& (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (xmode_unit)
|
| 3323 |
|
|
!= ((offset + GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode) - 1)
|
| 3324 |
|
|
/ GET_MODE_SIZE (xmode_unit))))
|
| 3325 |
|
|
{
|
| 3326 |
|
|
info->representable_p = false;
|
| 3327 |
|
|
rknown = true;
|
| 3328 |
|
|
}
|
| 3329 |
|
|
}
|
| 3330 |
|
|
else
|
| 3331 |
|
|
nregs_xmode = hard_regno_nregs[xregno][xmode];
|
| 3332 |
|
|
|
| 3333 |
|
|
nregs_ymode = hard_regno_nregs[xregno][ymode];
|
| 3334 |
|
|
|
| 3335 |
|
|
/* Paradoxical subregs are otherwise valid. */
|
| 3336 |
|
|
if (!rknown
|
| 3337 |
|
|
&& offset == 0
|
| 3338 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_PRECISION (ymode) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (xmode))
|
| 3339 |
|
|
{
|
| 3340 |
|
|
info->representable_p = true;
|
| 3341 |
|
|
/* If this is a big endian paradoxical subreg, which uses more
|
| 3342 |
|
|
actual hard registers than the original register, we must
|
| 3343 |
|
|
return a negative offset so that we find the proper highpart
|
| 3344 |
|
|
of the register. */
|
| 3345 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode) > UNITS_PER_WORD
|
| 3346 |
|
|
? REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN : BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
|
| 3347 |
|
|
info->offset = nregs_xmode - nregs_ymode;
|
| 3348 |
|
|
else
|
| 3349 |
|
|
info->offset = 0;
|
| 3350 |
|
|
info->nregs = nregs_ymode;
|
| 3351 |
|
|
return;
|
| 3352 |
|
|
}
|
| 3353 |
|
|
|
| 3354 |
|
|
/* If registers store different numbers of bits in the different
|
| 3355 |
|
|
modes, we cannot generally form this subreg. */
|
| 3356 |
|
|
if (!HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (xregno, xmode)
|
| 3357 |
|
|
&& !HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (xregno, ymode)
|
| 3358 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (xmode) % nregs_xmode) == 0
|
| 3359 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode) % nregs_ymode) == 0)
|
| 3360 |
|
|
{
|
| 3361 |
|
|
regsize_xmode = GET_MODE_SIZE (xmode) / nregs_xmode;
|
| 3362 |
|
|
regsize_ymode = GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode) / nregs_ymode;
|
| 3363 |
|
|
if (!rknown && regsize_xmode > regsize_ymode && nregs_ymode > 1)
|
| 3364 |
|
|
{
|
| 3365 |
|
|
info->representable_p = false;
|
| 3366 |
|
|
info->nregs
|
| 3367 |
|
|
= (GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode) + regsize_xmode - 1) / regsize_xmode;
|
| 3368 |
|
|
info->offset = offset / regsize_xmode;
|
| 3369 |
|
|
return;
|
| 3370 |
|
|
}
|
| 3371 |
|
|
if (!rknown && regsize_ymode > regsize_xmode && nregs_xmode > 1)
|
| 3372 |
|
|
{
|
| 3373 |
|
|
info->representable_p = false;
|
| 3374 |
|
|
info->nregs
|
| 3375 |
|
|
= (GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode) + regsize_xmode - 1) / regsize_xmode;
|
| 3376 |
|
|
info->offset = offset / regsize_xmode;
|
| 3377 |
|
|
return;
|
| 3378 |
|
|
}
|
| 3379 |
|
|
}
|
| 3380 |
|
|
|
| 3381 |
|
|
/* Lowpart subregs are otherwise valid. */
|
| 3382 |
|
|
if (!rknown && offset == subreg_lowpart_offset (ymode, xmode))
|
| 3383 |
|
|
{
|
| 3384 |
|
|
info->representable_p = true;
|
| 3385 |
|
|
rknown = true;
|
| 3386 |
|
|
|
| 3387 |
|
|
if (offset == 0 || nregs_xmode == nregs_ymode)
|
| 3388 |
|
|
{
|
| 3389 |
|
|
info->offset = 0;
|
| 3390 |
|
|
info->nregs = nregs_ymode;
|
| 3391 |
|
|
return;
|
| 3392 |
|
|
}
|
| 3393 |
|
|
}
|
| 3394 |
|
|
|
| 3395 |
|
|
/* This should always pass, otherwise we don't know how to verify
|
| 3396 |
|
|
the constraint. These conditions may be relaxed but
|
| 3397 |
|
|
subreg_regno_offset would need to be redesigned. */
|
| 3398 |
|
|
gcc_assert ((GET_MODE_SIZE (xmode) % GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode)) == 0);
|
| 3399 |
|
|
gcc_assert ((nregs_xmode % nregs_ymode) == 0);
|
| 3400 |
|
|
|
| 3401 |
|
|
if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN != REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
|
| 3402 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_SIZE (xmode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
|
| 3403 |
|
|
{
|
| 3404 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT xsize = GET_MODE_SIZE (xmode);
|
| 3405 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT ysize = GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode);
|
| 3406 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT off_low = offset & (ysize - 1);
|
| 3407 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT off_high = offset & ~(ysize - 1);
|
| 3408 |
|
|
offset = (xsize - ysize - off_high) | off_low;
|
| 3409 |
|
|
}
|
| 3410 |
|
|
/* The XMODE value can be seen as a vector of NREGS_XMODE
|
| 3411 |
|
|
values. The subreg must represent a lowpart of given field.
|
| 3412 |
|
|
Compute what field it is. */
|
| 3413 |
|
|
offset_adj = offset;
|
| 3414 |
|
|
offset_adj -= subreg_lowpart_offset (ymode,
|
| 3415 |
|
|
mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (xmode)
|
| 3416 |
|
|
/ nregs_xmode,
|
| 3417 |
|
|
MODE_INT, 0));
|
| 3418 |
|
|
|
| 3419 |
|
|
/* Size of ymode must not be greater than the size of xmode. */
|
| 3420 |
|
|
mode_multiple = GET_MODE_SIZE (xmode) / GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode);
|
| 3421 |
|
|
gcc_assert (mode_multiple != 0);
|
| 3422 |
|
|
|
| 3423 |
|
|
y_offset = offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode);
|
| 3424 |
|
|
y_offset_adj = offset_adj / GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode);
|
| 3425 |
|
|
nregs_multiple = nregs_xmode / nregs_ymode;
|
| 3426 |
|
|
|
| 3427 |
|
|
gcc_assert ((offset_adj % GET_MODE_SIZE (ymode)) == 0);
|
| 3428 |
|
|
gcc_assert ((mode_multiple % nregs_multiple) == 0);
|
| 3429 |
|
|
|
| 3430 |
|
|
if (!rknown)
|
| 3431 |
|
|
{
|
| 3432 |
|
|
info->representable_p = (!(y_offset_adj % (mode_multiple / nregs_multiple)));
|
| 3433 |
|
|
rknown = true;
|
| 3434 |
|
|
}
|
| 3435 |
|
|
info->offset = (y_offset / (mode_multiple / nregs_multiple)) * nregs_ymode;
|
| 3436 |
|
|
info->nregs = nregs_ymode;
|
| 3437 |
|
|
}
|
| 3438 |
|
|
|
| 3439 |
|
|
/* This function returns the regno offset of a subreg expression.
|
| 3440 |
|
|
xregno - A regno of an inner hard subreg_reg (or what will become one).
|
| 3441 |
|
|
xmode - The mode of xregno.
|
| 3442 |
|
|
offset - The byte offset.
|
| 3443 |
|
|
ymode - The mode of a top level SUBREG (or what may become one).
|
| 3444 |
|
|
RETURN - The regno offset which would be used. */
|
| 3445 |
|
|
unsigned int
|
| 3446 |
|
|
subreg_regno_offset (unsigned int xregno, enum machine_mode xmode,
|
| 3447 |
|
|
unsigned int offset, enum machine_mode ymode)
|
| 3448 |
|
|
{
|
| 3449 |
|
|
struct subreg_info info;
|
| 3450 |
|
|
subreg_get_info (xregno, xmode, offset, ymode, &info);
|
| 3451 |
|
|
return info.offset;
|
| 3452 |
|
|
}
|
| 3453 |
|
|
|
| 3454 |
|
|
/* This function returns true when the offset is representable via
|
| 3455 |
|
|
subreg_offset in the given regno.
|
| 3456 |
|
|
xregno - A regno of an inner hard subreg_reg (or what will become one).
|
| 3457 |
|
|
xmode - The mode of xregno.
|
| 3458 |
|
|
offset - The byte offset.
|
| 3459 |
|
|
ymode - The mode of a top level SUBREG (or what may become one).
|
| 3460 |
|
|
RETURN - Whether the offset is representable. */
|
| 3461 |
|
|
bool
|
| 3462 |
|
|
subreg_offset_representable_p (unsigned int xregno, enum machine_mode xmode,
|
| 3463 |
|
|
unsigned int offset, enum machine_mode ymode)
|
| 3464 |
|
|
{
|
| 3465 |
|
|
struct subreg_info info;
|
| 3466 |
|
|
subreg_get_info (xregno, xmode, offset, ymode, &info);
|
| 3467 |
|
|
return info.representable_p;
|
| 3468 |
|
|
}
|
| 3469 |
|
|
|
| 3470 |
|
|
/* Return the number of a YMODE register to which
|
| 3471 |
|
|
|
| 3472 |
|
|
(subreg:YMODE (reg:XMODE XREGNO) OFFSET)
|
| 3473 |
|
|
|
| 3474 |
|
|
can be simplified. Return -1 if the subreg can't be simplified.
|
| 3475 |
|
|
|
| 3476 |
|
|
XREGNO is a hard register number. */
|
| 3477 |
|
|
|
| 3478 |
|
|
int
|
| 3479 |
|
|
simplify_subreg_regno (unsigned int xregno, enum machine_mode xmode,
|
| 3480 |
|
|
unsigned int offset, enum machine_mode ymode)
|
| 3481 |
|
|
{
|
| 3482 |
|
|
struct subreg_info info;
|
| 3483 |
|
|
unsigned int yregno;
|
| 3484 |
|
|
|
| 3485 |
|
|
#ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
|
| 3486 |
|
|
/* Give the backend a chance to disallow the mode change. */
|
| 3487 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_CLASS (xmode) != MODE_COMPLEX_INT
|
| 3488 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (xmode) != MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
|
| 3489 |
|
|
&& REG_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P (xregno, xmode, ymode))
|
| 3490 |
|
|
return -1;
|
| 3491 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 3492 |
|
|
|
| 3493 |
|
|
/* We shouldn't simplify stack-related registers. */
|
| 3494 |
|
|
if ((!reload_completed || frame_pointer_needed)
|
| 3495 |
|
|
&& xregno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
|
| 3496 |
|
|
return -1;
|
| 3497 |
|
|
|
| 3498 |
|
|
if (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
|
| 3499 |
|
|
&& xregno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)
|
| 3500 |
|
|
return -1;
|
| 3501 |
|
|
|
| 3502 |
|
|
if (xregno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
|
| 3503 |
|
|
return -1;
|
| 3504 |
|
|
|
| 3505 |
|
|
/* Try to get the register offset. */
|
| 3506 |
|
|
subreg_get_info (xregno, xmode, offset, ymode, &info);
|
| 3507 |
|
|
if (!info.representable_p)
|
| 3508 |
|
|
return -1;
|
| 3509 |
|
|
|
| 3510 |
|
|
/* Make sure that the offsetted register value is in range. */
|
| 3511 |
|
|
yregno = xregno + info.offset;
|
| 3512 |
|
|
if (!HARD_REGISTER_NUM_P (yregno))
|
| 3513 |
|
|
return -1;
|
| 3514 |
|
|
|
| 3515 |
|
|
/* See whether (reg:YMODE YREGNO) is valid.
|
| 3516 |
|
|
|
| 3517 |
|
|
??? We allow invalid registers if (reg:XMODE XREGNO) is also invalid.
|
| 3518 |
|
|
This is a kludge to work around how complex FP arguments are passed
|
| 3519 |
|
|
on IA-64 and should be fixed. See PR target/49226. */
|
| 3520 |
|
|
if (!HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (yregno, ymode)
|
| 3521 |
|
|
&& HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (xregno, xmode))
|
| 3522 |
|
|
return -1;
|
| 3523 |
|
|
|
| 3524 |
|
|
return (int) yregno;
|
| 3525 |
|
|
}
|
| 3526 |
|
|
|
| 3527 |
|
|
/* Return the final regno that a subreg expression refers to. */
|
| 3528 |
|
|
unsigned int
|
| 3529 |
|
|
subreg_regno (const_rtx x)
|
| 3530 |
|
|
{
|
| 3531 |
|
|
unsigned int ret;
|
| 3532 |
|
|
rtx subreg = SUBREG_REG (x);
|
| 3533 |
|
|
int regno = REGNO (subreg);
|
| 3534 |
|
|
|
| 3535 |
|
|
ret = regno + subreg_regno_offset (regno,
|
| 3536 |
|
|
GET_MODE (subreg),
|
| 3537 |
|
|
SUBREG_BYTE (x),
|
| 3538 |
|
|
GET_MODE (x));
|
| 3539 |
|
|
return ret;
|
| 3540 |
|
|
|
| 3541 |
|
|
}
|
| 3542 |
|
|
|
| 3543 |
|
|
/* Return the number of registers that a subreg expression refers
|
| 3544 |
|
|
to. */
|
| 3545 |
|
|
unsigned int
|
| 3546 |
|
|
subreg_nregs (const_rtx x)
|
| 3547 |
|
|
{
|
| 3548 |
|
|
return subreg_nregs_with_regno (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x)), x);
|
| 3549 |
|
|
}
|
| 3550 |
|
|
|
| 3551 |
|
|
/* Return the number of registers that a subreg REG with REGNO
|
| 3552 |
|
|
expression refers to. This is a copy of the rtlanal.c:subreg_nregs
|
| 3553 |
|
|
changed so that the regno can be passed in. */
|
| 3554 |
|
|
|
| 3555 |
|
|
unsigned int
|
| 3556 |
|
|
subreg_nregs_with_regno (unsigned int regno, const_rtx x)
|
| 3557 |
|
|
{
|
| 3558 |
|
|
struct subreg_info info;
|
| 3559 |
|
|
rtx subreg = SUBREG_REG (x);
|
| 3560 |
|
|
|
| 3561 |
|
|
subreg_get_info (regno, GET_MODE (subreg), SUBREG_BYTE (x), GET_MODE (x),
|
| 3562 |
|
|
&info);
|
| 3563 |
|
|
return info.nregs;
|
| 3564 |
|
|
}
|
| 3565 |
|
|
|
| 3566 |
|
|
|
| 3567 |
|
|
struct parms_set_data
|
| 3568 |
|
|
{
|
| 3569 |
|
|
int nregs;
|
| 3570 |
|
|
HARD_REG_SET regs;
|
| 3571 |
|
|
};
|
| 3572 |
|
|
|
| 3573 |
|
|
/* Helper function for noticing stores to parameter registers. */
|
| 3574 |
|
|
static void
|
| 3575 |
|
|
parms_set (rtx x, const_rtx pat ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, void *data)
|
| 3576 |
|
|
{
|
| 3577 |
|
|
struct parms_set_data *const d = (struct parms_set_data *) data;
|
| 3578 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
| 3579 |
|
|
&& TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (d->regs, REGNO (x)))
|
| 3580 |
|
|
{
|
| 3581 |
|
|
CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (d->regs, REGNO (x));
|
| 3582 |
|
|
d->nregs--;
|
| 3583 |
|
|
}
|
| 3584 |
|
|
}
|
| 3585 |
|
|
|
| 3586 |
|
|
/* Look backward for first parameter to be loaded.
|
| 3587 |
|
|
Note that loads of all parameters will not necessarily be
|
| 3588 |
|
|
found if CSE has eliminated some of them (e.g., an argument
|
| 3589 |
|
|
to the outer function is passed down as a parameter).
|
| 3590 |
|
|
Do not skip BOUNDARY. */
|
| 3591 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 3592 |
|
|
find_first_parameter_load (rtx call_insn, rtx boundary)
|
| 3593 |
|
|
{
|
| 3594 |
|
|
struct parms_set_data parm;
|
| 3595 |
|
|
rtx p, before, first_set;
|
| 3596 |
|
|
|
| 3597 |
|
|
/* Since different machines initialize their parameter registers
|
| 3598 |
|
|
in different orders, assume nothing. Collect the set of all
|
| 3599 |
|
|
parameter registers. */
|
| 3600 |
|
|
CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (parm.regs);
|
| 3601 |
|
|
parm.nregs = 0;
|
| 3602 |
|
|
for (p = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (call_insn); p; p = XEXP (p, 1))
|
| 3603 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (XEXP (p, 0)) == USE
|
| 3604 |
|
|
&& REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (p, 0), 0)))
|
| 3605 |
|
|
{
|
| 3606 |
|
|
gcc_assert (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (p, 0), 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER);
|
| 3607 |
|
|
|
| 3608 |
|
|
/* We only care about registers which can hold function
|
| 3609 |
|
|
arguments. */
|
| 3610 |
|
|
if (!FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (p, 0), 0))))
|
| 3611 |
|
|
continue;
|
| 3612 |
|
|
|
| 3613 |
|
|
SET_HARD_REG_BIT (parm.regs, REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (p, 0), 0)));
|
| 3614 |
|
|
parm.nregs++;
|
| 3615 |
|
|
}
|
| 3616 |
|
|
before = call_insn;
|
| 3617 |
|
|
first_set = call_insn;
|
| 3618 |
|
|
|
| 3619 |
|
|
/* Search backward for the first set of a register in this set. */
|
| 3620 |
|
|
while (parm.nregs && before != boundary)
|
| 3621 |
|
|
{
|
| 3622 |
|
|
before = PREV_INSN (before);
|
| 3623 |
|
|
|
| 3624 |
|
|
/* It is possible that some loads got CSEed from one call to
|
| 3625 |
|
|
another. Stop in that case. */
|
| 3626 |
|
|
if (CALL_P (before))
|
| 3627 |
|
|
break;
|
| 3628 |
|
|
|
| 3629 |
|
|
/* Our caller needs either ensure that we will find all sets
|
| 3630 |
|
|
(in case code has not been optimized yet), or take care
|
| 3631 |
|
|
for possible labels in a way by setting boundary to preceding
|
| 3632 |
|
|
CODE_LABEL. */
|
| 3633 |
|
|
if (LABEL_P (before))
|
| 3634 |
|
|
{
|
| 3635 |
|
|
gcc_assert (before == boundary);
|
| 3636 |
|
|
break;
|
| 3637 |
|
|
}
|
| 3638 |
|
|
|
| 3639 |
|
|
if (INSN_P (before))
|
| 3640 |
|
|
{
|
| 3641 |
|
|
int nregs_old = parm.nregs;
|
| 3642 |
|
|
note_stores (PATTERN (before), parms_set, &parm);
|
| 3643 |
|
|
/* If we found something that did not set a parameter reg,
|
| 3644 |
|
|
we're done. Do not keep going, as that might result
|
| 3645 |
|
|
in hoisting an insn before the setting of a pseudo
|
| 3646 |
|
|
that is used by the hoisted insn. */
|
| 3647 |
|
|
if (nregs_old != parm.nregs)
|
| 3648 |
|
|
first_set = before;
|
| 3649 |
|
|
else
|
| 3650 |
|
|
break;
|
| 3651 |
|
|
}
|
| 3652 |
|
|
}
|
| 3653 |
|
|
return first_set;
|
| 3654 |
|
|
}
|
| 3655 |
|
|
|
| 3656 |
|
|
/* Return true if we should avoid inserting code between INSN and preceding
|
| 3657 |
|
|
call instruction. */
|
| 3658 |
|
|
|
| 3659 |
|
|
bool
|
| 3660 |
|
|
keep_with_call_p (const_rtx insn)
|
| 3661 |
|
|
{
|
| 3662 |
|
|
rtx set;
|
| 3663 |
|
|
|
| 3664 |
|
|
if (INSN_P (insn) && (set = single_set (insn)) != NULL)
|
| 3665 |
|
|
{
|
| 3666 |
|
|
if (REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
|
| 3667 |
|
|
&& REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
|
| 3668 |
|
|
&& fixed_regs[REGNO (SET_DEST (set))]
|
| 3669 |
|
|
&& general_operand (SET_SRC (set), VOIDmode))
|
| 3670 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 3671 |
|
|
if (REG_P (SET_SRC (set))
|
| 3672 |
|
|
&& targetm.calls.function_value_regno_p (REGNO (SET_SRC (set)))
|
| 3673 |
|
|
&& REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
|
| 3674 |
|
|
&& REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
|
| 3675 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 3676 |
|
|
/* There may be a stack pop just after the call and before the store
|
| 3677 |
|
|
of the return register. Search for the actual store when deciding
|
| 3678 |
|
|
if we can break or not. */
|
| 3679 |
|
|
if (SET_DEST (set) == stack_pointer_rtx)
|
| 3680 |
|
|
{
|
| 3681 |
|
|
/* This CONST_CAST is okay because next_nonnote_insn just
|
| 3682 |
|
|
returns its argument and we assign it to a const_rtx
|
| 3683 |
|
|
variable. */
|
| 3684 |
|
|
const_rtx i2 = next_nonnote_insn (CONST_CAST_RTX(insn));
|
| 3685 |
|
|
if (i2 && keep_with_call_p (i2))
|
| 3686 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 3687 |
|
|
}
|
| 3688 |
|
|
}
|
| 3689 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 3690 |
|
|
}
|
| 3691 |
|
|
|
| 3692 |
|
|
/* Return true if LABEL is a target of JUMP_INSN. This applies only
|
| 3693 |
|
|
to non-complex jumps. That is, direct unconditional, conditional,
|
| 3694 |
|
|
and tablejumps, but not computed jumps or returns. It also does
|
| 3695 |
|
|
not apply to the fallthru case of a conditional jump. */
|
| 3696 |
|
|
|
| 3697 |
|
|
bool
|
| 3698 |
|
|
label_is_jump_target_p (const_rtx label, const_rtx jump_insn)
|
| 3699 |
|
|
{
|
| 3700 |
|
|
rtx tmp = JUMP_LABEL (jump_insn);
|
| 3701 |
|
|
|
| 3702 |
|
|
if (label == tmp)
|
| 3703 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 3704 |
|
|
|
| 3705 |
|
|
if (tablejump_p (jump_insn, NULL, &tmp))
|
| 3706 |
|
|
{
|
| 3707 |
|
|
rtvec vec = XVEC (PATTERN (tmp),
|
| 3708 |
|
|
GET_CODE (PATTERN (tmp)) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC);
|
| 3709 |
|
|
int i, veclen = GET_NUM_ELEM (vec);
|
| 3710 |
|
|
|
| 3711 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < veclen; ++i)
|
| 3712 |
|
|
if (XEXP (RTVEC_ELT (vec, i), 0) == label)
|
| 3713 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 3714 |
|
|
}
|
| 3715 |
|
|
|
| 3716 |
|
|
if (find_reg_note (jump_insn, REG_LABEL_TARGET, label))
|
| 3717 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 3718 |
|
|
|
| 3719 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 3720 |
|
|
}
|
| 3721 |
|
|
|
| 3722 |
|
|
|
| 3723 |
|
|
/* Return an estimate of the cost of computing rtx X.
|
| 3724 |
|
|
One use is in cse, to decide which expression to keep in the hash table.
|
| 3725 |
|
|
Another is in rtl generation, to pick the cheapest way to multiply.
|
| 3726 |
|
|
Other uses like the latter are expected in the future.
|
| 3727 |
|
|
|
| 3728 |
|
|
X appears as operand OPNO in an expression with code OUTER_CODE.
|
| 3729 |
|
|
SPEED specifies whether costs optimized for speed or size should
|
| 3730 |
|
|
be returned. */
|
| 3731 |
|
|
|
| 3732 |
|
|
int
|
| 3733 |
|
|
rtx_cost (rtx x, enum rtx_code outer_code, int opno, bool speed)
|
| 3734 |
|
|
{
|
| 3735 |
|
|
int i, j;
|
| 3736 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
| 3737 |
|
|
const char *fmt;
|
| 3738 |
|
|
int total;
|
| 3739 |
|
|
|
| 3740 |
|
|
if (x == 0)
|
| 3741 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 3742 |
|
|
|
| 3743 |
|
|
/* Compute the default costs of certain things.
|
| 3744 |
|
|
Note that targetm.rtx_costs can override the defaults. */
|
| 3745 |
|
|
|
| 3746 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 3747 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 3748 |
|
|
{
|
| 3749 |
|
|
case MULT:
|
| 3750 |
|
|
total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
|
| 3751 |
|
|
break;
|
| 3752 |
|
|
case DIV:
|
| 3753 |
|
|
case UDIV:
|
| 3754 |
|
|
case MOD:
|
| 3755 |
|
|
case UMOD:
|
| 3756 |
|
|
total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
|
| 3757 |
|
|
break;
|
| 3758 |
|
|
case USE:
|
| 3759 |
|
|
/* Used in combine.c as a marker. */
|
| 3760 |
|
|
total = 0;
|
| 3761 |
|
|
break;
|
| 3762 |
|
|
default:
|
| 3763 |
|
|
total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
|
| 3764 |
|
|
}
|
| 3765 |
|
|
|
| 3766 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 3767 |
|
|
{
|
| 3768 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 3769 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 3770 |
|
|
|
| 3771 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
| 3772 |
|
|
total = 0;
|
| 3773 |
|
|
/* If we can't tie these modes, make this expensive. The larger
|
| 3774 |
|
|
the mode, the more expensive it is. */
|
| 3775 |
|
|
if (! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
|
| 3776 |
|
|
return COSTS_N_INSNS (2
|
| 3777 |
|
|
+ GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
|
| 3778 |
|
|
break;
|
| 3779 |
|
|
|
| 3780 |
|
|
default:
|
| 3781 |
|
|
if (targetm.rtx_costs (x, code, outer_code, opno, &total, speed))
|
| 3782 |
|
|
return total;
|
| 3783 |
|
|
break;
|
| 3784 |
|
|
}
|
| 3785 |
|
|
|
| 3786 |
|
|
/* Sum the costs of the sub-rtx's, plus cost of this operation,
|
| 3787 |
|
|
which is already in total. */
|
| 3788 |
|
|
|
| 3789 |
|
|
fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
|
| 3790 |
|
|
for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
|
| 3791 |
|
|
if (fmt[i] == 'e')
|
| 3792 |
|
|
total += rtx_cost (XEXP (x, i), code, i, speed);
|
| 3793 |
|
|
else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
|
| 3794 |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
|
| 3795 |
|
|
total += rtx_cost (XVECEXP (x, i, j), code, i, speed);
|
| 3796 |
|
|
|
| 3797 |
|
|
return total;
|
| 3798 |
|
|
}
|
| 3799 |
|
|
|
| 3800 |
|
|
/* Fill in the structure C with information about both speed and size rtx
|
| 3801 |
|
|
costs for X, which is operand OPNO in an expression with code OUTER. */
|
| 3802 |
|
|
|
| 3803 |
|
|
void
|
| 3804 |
|
|
get_full_rtx_cost (rtx x, enum rtx_code outer, int opno,
|
| 3805 |
|
|
struct full_rtx_costs *c)
|
| 3806 |
|
|
{
|
| 3807 |
|
|
c->speed = rtx_cost (x, outer, opno, true);
|
| 3808 |
|
|
c->size = rtx_cost (x, outer, opno, false);
|
| 3809 |
|
|
}
|
| 3810 |
|
|
|
| 3811 |
|
|
|
| 3812 |
|
|
/* Return cost of address expression X.
|
| 3813 |
|
|
Expect that X is properly formed address reference.
|
| 3814 |
|
|
|
| 3815 |
|
|
SPEED parameter specify whether costs optimized for speed or size should
|
| 3816 |
|
|
be returned. */
|
| 3817 |
|
|
|
| 3818 |
|
|
int
|
| 3819 |
|
|
address_cost (rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, addr_space_t as, bool speed)
|
| 3820 |
|
|
{
|
| 3821 |
|
|
/* We may be asked for cost of various unusual addresses, such as operands
|
| 3822 |
|
|
of push instruction. It is not worthwhile to complicate writing
|
| 3823 |
|
|
of the target hook by such cases. */
|
| 3824 |
|
|
|
| 3825 |
|
|
if (!memory_address_addr_space_p (mode, x, as))
|
| 3826 |
|
|
return 1000;
|
| 3827 |
|
|
|
| 3828 |
|
|
return targetm.address_cost (x, speed);
|
| 3829 |
|
|
}
|
| 3830 |
|
|
|
| 3831 |
|
|
/* If the target doesn't override, compute the cost as with arithmetic. */
|
| 3832 |
|
|
|
| 3833 |
|
|
int
|
| 3834 |
|
|
default_address_cost (rtx x, bool speed)
|
| 3835 |
|
|
{
|
| 3836 |
|
|
return rtx_cost (x, MEM, 0, speed);
|
| 3837 |
|
|
}
|
| 3838 |
|
|
|
| 3839 |
|
|
|
| 3840 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
|
| 3841 |
|
|
nonzero_bits (const_rtx x, enum machine_mode mode)
|
| 3842 |
|
|
{
|
| 3843 |
|
|
return cached_nonzero_bits (x, mode, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
|
| 3844 |
|
|
}
|
| 3845 |
|
|
|
| 3846 |
|
|
unsigned int
|
| 3847 |
|
|
num_sign_bit_copies (const_rtx x, enum machine_mode mode)
|
| 3848 |
|
|
{
|
| 3849 |
|
|
return cached_num_sign_bit_copies (x, mode, NULL_RTX, VOIDmode, 0);
|
| 3850 |
|
|
}
|
| 3851 |
|
|
|
| 3852 |
|
|
/* The function cached_nonzero_bits is a wrapper around nonzero_bits1.
|
| 3853 |
|
|
It avoids exponential behavior in nonzero_bits1 when X has
|
| 3854 |
|
|
identical subexpressions on the first or the second level. */
|
| 3855 |
|
|
|
| 3856 |
|
|
static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
|
| 3857 |
|
|
cached_nonzero_bits (const_rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, const_rtx known_x,
|
| 3858 |
|
|
enum machine_mode known_mode,
|
| 3859 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT known_ret)
|
| 3860 |
|
|
{
|
| 3861 |
|
|
if (x == known_x && mode == known_mode)
|
| 3862 |
|
|
return known_ret;
|
| 3863 |
|
|
|
| 3864 |
|
|
/* Try to find identical subexpressions. If found call
|
| 3865 |
|
|
nonzero_bits1 on X with the subexpressions as KNOWN_X and the
|
| 3866 |
|
|
precomputed value for the subexpression as KNOWN_RET. */
|
| 3867 |
|
|
|
| 3868 |
|
|
if (ARITHMETIC_P (x))
|
| 3869 |
|
|
{
|
| 3870 |
|
|
rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 3871 |
|
|
rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
|
| 3872 |
|
|
|
| 3873 |
|
|
/* Check the first level. */
|
| 3874 |
|
|
if (x0 == x1)
|
| 3875 |
|
|
return nonzero_bits1 (x, mode, x0, mode,
|
| 3876 |
|
|
cached_nonzero_bits (x0, mode, known_x,
|
| 3877 |
|
|
known_mode, known_ret));
|
| 3878 |
|
|
|
| 3879 |
|
|
/* Check the second level. */
|
| 3880 |
|
|
if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0)
|
| 3881 |
|
|
&& (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
|
| 3882 |
|
|
return nonzero_bits1 (x, mode, x1, mode,
|
| 3883 |
|
|
cached_nonzero_bits (x1, mode, known_x,
|
| 3884 |
|
|
known_mode, known_ret));
|
| 3885 |
|
|
|
| 3886 |
|
|
if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1)
|
| 3887 |
|
|
&& (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
|
| 3888 |
|
|
return nonzero_bits1 (x, mode, x0, mode,
|
| 3889 |
|
|
cached_nonzero_bits (x0, mode, known_x,
|
| 3890 |
|
|
known_mode, known_ret));
|
| 3891 |
|
|
}
|
| 3892 |
|
|
|
| 3893 |
|
|
return nonzero_bits1 (x, mode, known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 3894 |
|
|
}
|
| 3895 |
|
|
|
| 3896 |
|
|
/* We let num_sign_bit_copies recur into nonzero_bits as that is useful.
|
| 3897 |
|
|
We don't let nonzero_bits recur into num_sign_bit_copies, because that
|
| 3898 |
|
|
is less useful. We can't allow both, because that results in exponential
|
| 3899 |
|
|
run time recursion. There is a nullstone testcase that triggered
|
| 3900 |
|
|
this. This macro avoids accidental uses of num_sign_bit_copies. */
|
| 3901 |
|
|
#define cached_num_sign_bit_copies sorry_i_am_preventing_exponential_behavior
|
| 3902 |
|
|
|
| 3903 |
|
|
/* Given an expression, X, compute which bits in X can be nonzero.
|
| 3904 |
|
|
We don't care about bits outside of those defined in MODE.
|
| 3905 |
|
|
|
| 3906 |
|
|
For most X this is simply GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (MODE)), but if X is
|
| 3907 |
|
|
an arithmetic operation, we can do better. */
|
| 3908 |
|
|
|
| 3909 |
|
|
static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
|
| 3910 |
|
|
nonzero_bits1 (const_rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, const_rtx known_x,
|
| 3911 |
|
|
enum machine_mode known_mode,
|
| 3912 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT known_ret)
|
| 3913 |
|
|
{
|
| 3914 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
|
| 3915 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT inner_nz;
|
| 3916 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
| 3917 |
|
|
enum machine_mode inner_mode;
|
| 3918 |
|
|
unsigned int mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
|
| 3919 |
|
|
|
| 3920 |
|
|
/* For floating-point and vector values, assume all bits are needed. */
|
| 3921 |
|
|
if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)) || FLOAT_MODE_P (mode)
|
| 3922 |
|
|
|| VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)) || VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
|
| 3923 |
|
|
return nonzero;
|
| 3924 |
|
|
|
| 3925 |
|
|
/* If X is wider than MODE, use its mode instead. */
|
| 3926 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) > mode_width)
|
| 3927 |
|
|
{
|
| 3928 |
|
|
mode = GET_MODE (x);
|
| 3929 |
|
|
nonzero = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
|
| 3930 |
|
|
mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
|
| 3931 |
|
|
}
|
| 3932 |
|
|
|
| 3933 |
|
|
if (mode_width > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
| 3934 |
|
|
/* Our only callers in this case look for single bit values. So
|
| 3935 |
|
|
just return the mode mask. Those tests will then be false. */
|
| 3936 |
|
|
return nonzero;
|
| 3937 |
|
|
|
| 3938 |
|
|
#ifndef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
|
| 3939 |
|
|
/* If MODE is wider than X, but both are a single word for both the host
|
| 3940 |
|
|
and target machines, we can compute this from which bits of the
|
| 3941 |
|
|
object might be nonzero in its own mode, taking into account the fact
|
| 3942 |
|
|
that on many CISC machines, accessing an object in a wider mode
|
| 3943 |
|
|
causes the high-order bits to become undefined. So they are
|
| 3944 |
|
|
not known to be zero. */
|
| 3945 |
|
|
|
| 3946 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode && GET_MODE (x) != mode
|
| 3947 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) <= BITS_PER_WORD
|
| 3948 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
| 3949 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 3950 |
|
|
{
|
| 3951 |
|
|
nonzero &= cached_nonzero_bits (x, GET_MODE (x),
|
| 3952 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 3953 |
|
|
nonzero |= GET_MODE_MASK (mode) & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
|
| 3954 |
|
|
return nonzero;
|
| 3955 |
|
|
}
|
| 3956 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 3957 |
|
|
|
| 3958 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 3959 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 3960 |
|
|
{
|
| 3961 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 3962 |
|
|
#if defined(POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED) && !defined(HAVE_ptr_extend)
|
| 3963 |
|
|
/* If pointers extend unsigned and this is a pointer in Pmode, say that
|
| 3964 |
|
|
all the bits above ptr_mode are known to be zero. */
|
| 3965 |
|
|
/* As we do not know which address space the pointer is refering to,
|
| 3966 |
|
|
we can do this only if the target does not support different pointer
|
| 3967 |
|
|
or address modes depending on the address space. */
|
| 3968 |
|
|
if (target_default_pointer_address_modes_p ()
|
| 3969 |
|
|
&& POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED && GET_MODE (x) == Pmode
|
| 3970 |
|
|
&& REG_POINTER (x))
|
| 3971 |
|
|
nonzero &= GET_MODE_MASK (ptr_mode);
|
| 3972 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 3973 |
|
|
|
| 3974 |
|
|
/* Include declared information about alignment of pointers. */
|
| 3975 |
|
|
/* ??? We don't properly preserve REG_POINTER changes across
|
| 3976 |
|
|
pointer-to-integer casts, so we can't trust it except for
|
| 3977 |
|
|
things that we know must be pointers. See execute/960116-1.c. */
|
| 3978 |
|
|
if ((x == stack_pointer_rtx
|
| 3979 |
|
|
|| x == frame_pointer_rtx
|
| 3980 |
|
|
|| x == arg_pointer_rtx)
|
| 3981 |
|
|
&& REGNO_POINTER_ALIGN (REGNO (x)))
|
| 3982 |
|
|
{
|
| 3983 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT alignment
|
| 3984 |
|
|
= REGNO_POINTER_ALIGN (REGNO (x)) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
|
| 3985 |
|
|
|
| 3986 |
|
|
#ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
|
| 3987 |
|
|
/* If PUSH_ROUNDING is defined, it is possible for the
|
| 3988 |
|
|
stack to be momentarily aligned only to that amount,
|
| 3989 |
|
|
so we pick the least alignment. */
|
| 3990 |
|
|
if (x == stack_pointer_rtx && PUSH_ARGS)
|
| 3991 |
|
|
alignment = MIN ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) PUSH_ROUNDING (1),
|
| 3992 |
|
|
alignment);
|
| 3993 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 3994 |
|
|
|
| 3995 |
|
|
nonzero &= ~(alignment - 1);
|
| 3996 |
|
|
}
|
| 3997 |
|
|
|
| 3998 |
|
|
{
|
| 3999 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero_for_hook = nonzero;
|
| 4000 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = rtl_hooks.reg_nonzero_bits (x, mode, known_x,
|
| 4001 |
|
|
known_mode, known_ret,
|
| 4002 |
|
|
&nonzero_for_hook);
|
| 4003 |
|
|
|
| 4004 |
|
|
if (new_rtx)
|
| 4005 |
|
|
nonzero_for_hook &= cached_nonzero_bits (new_rtx, mode, known_x,
|
| 4006 |
|
|
known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4007 |
|
|
|
| 4008 |
|
|
return nonzero_for_hook;
|
| 4009 |
|
|
}
|
| 4010 |
|
|
|
| 4011 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 4012 |
|
|
#ifdef SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
|
| 4013 |
|
|
/* If X is negative in MODE, sign-extend the value. */
|
| 4014 |
|
|
if (INTVAL (x) > 0
|
| 4015 |
|
|
&& mode_width < BITS_PER_WORD
|
| 4016 |
|
|
&& (UINTVAL (x) & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)))
|
| 4017 |
|
|
!= 0)
|
| 4018 |
|
|
return UINTVAL (x) | ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (-1) << mode_width);
|
| 4019 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4020 |
|
|
|
| 4021 |
|
|
return UINTVAL (x);
|
| 4022 |
|
|
|
| 4023 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 4024 |
|
|
#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
|
| 4025 |
|
|
/* In many, if not most, RISC machines, reading a byte from memory
|
| 4026 |
|
|
zeros the rest of the register. Noticing that fact saves a lot
|
| 4027 |
|
|
of extra zero-extends. */
|
| 4028 |
|
|
if (LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (x)) == ZERO_EXTEND)
|
| 4029 |
|
|
nonzero &= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
|
| 4030 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4031 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4032 |
|
|
|
| 4033 |
|
|
case EQ: case NE:
|
| 4034 |
|
|
case UNEQ: case LTGT:
|
| 4035 |
|
|
case GT: case GTU: case UNGT:
|
| 4036 |
|
|
case LT: case LTU: case UNLT:
|
| 4037 |
|
|
case GE: case GEU: case UNGE:
|
| 4038 |
|
|
case LE: case LEU: case UNLE:
|
| 4039 |
|
|
case UNORDERED: case ORDERED:
|
| 4040 |
|
|
/* If this produces an integer result, we know which bits are set.
|
| 4041 |
|
|
Code here used to clear bits outside the mode of X, but that is
|
| 4042 |
|
|
now done above. */
|
| 4043 |
|
|
/* Mind that MODE is the mode the caller wants to look at this
|
| 4044 |
|
|
operation in, and not the actual operation mode. We can wind
|
| 4045 |
|
|
up with (subreg:DI (gt:V4HI x y)), and we don't have anything
|
| 4046 |
|
|
that describes the results of a vector compare. */
|
| 4047 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT
|
| 4048 |
|
|
&& mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
| 4049 |
|
|
nonzero = STORE_FLAG_VALUE;
|
| 4050 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4051 |
|
|
|
| 4052 |
|
|
case NEG:
|
| 4053 |
|
|
#if 0
|
| 4054 |
|
|
/* Disabled to avoid exponential mutual recursion between nonzero_bits
|
| 4055 |
|
|
and num_sign_bit_copies. */
|
| 4056 |
|
|
if (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (x))
|
| 4057 |
|
|
== GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 4058 |
|
|
nonzero = 1;
|
| 4059 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4060 |
|
|
|
| 4061 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) < mode_width)
|
| 4062 |
|
|
nonzero |= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode) & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)));
|
| 4063 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4064 |
|
|
|
| 4065 |
|
|
case ABS:
|
| 4066 |
|
|
#if 0
|
| 4067 |
|
|
/* Disabled to avoid exponential mutual recursion between nonzero_bits
|
| 4068 |
|
|
and num_sign_bit_copies. */
|
| 4069 |
|
|
if (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (x))
|
| 4070 |
|
|
== GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 4071 |
|
|
nonzero = 1;
|
| 4072 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4073 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4074 |
|
|
|
| 4075 |
|
|
case TRUNCATE:
|
| 4076 |
|
|
nonzero &= (cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4077 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret)
|
| 4078 |
|
|
& GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
|
| 4079 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4080 |
|
|
|
| 4081 |
|
|
case ZERO_EXTEND:
|
| 4082 |
|
|
nonzero &= cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4083 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4084 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) != VOIDmode)
|
| 4085 |
|
|
nonzero &= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
|
| 4086 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4087 |
|
|
|
| 4088 |
|
|
case SIGN_EXTEND:
|
| 4089 |
|
|
/* If the sign bit is known clear, this is the same as ZERO_EXTEND.
|
| 4090 |
|
|
Otherwise, show all the bits in the outer mode but not the inner
|
| 4091 |
|
|
may be nonzero. */
|
| 4092 |
|
|
inner_nz = cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4093 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4094 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) != VOIDmode)
|
| 4095 |
|
|
{
|
| 4096 |
|
|
inner_nz &= GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
|
| 4097 |
|
|
if (val_signbit_known_set_p (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)), inner_nz))
|
| 4098 |
|
|
inner_nz |= (GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
|
| 4099 |
|
|
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))));
|
| 4100 |
|
|
}
|
| 4101 |
|
|
|
| 4102 |
|
|
nonzero &= inner_nz;
|
| 4103 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4104 |
|
|
|
| 4105 |
|
|
case AND:
|
| 4106 |
|
|
nonzero &= cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4107 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret)
|
| 4108 |
|
|
& cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
|
| 4109 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4110 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4111 |
|
|
|
| 4112 |
|
|
case XOR: case IOR:
|
| 4113 |
|
|
case UMIN: case UMAX: case SMIN: case SMAX:
|
| 4114 |
|
|
{
|
| 4115 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero0
|
| 4116 |
|
|
= cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4117 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4118 |
|
|
|
| 4119 |
|
|
/* Don't call nonzero_bits for the second time if it cannot change
|
| 4120 |
|
|
anything. */
|
| 4121 |
|
|
if ((nonzero & nonzero0) != nonzero)
|
| 4122 |
|
|
nonzero &= nonzero0
|
| 4123 |
|
|
| cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
|
| 4124 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4125 |
|
|
}
|
| 4126 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4127 |
|
|
|
| 4128 |
|
|
case PLUS: case MINUS:
|
| 4129 |
|
|
case MULT:
|
| 4130 |
|
|
case DIV: case UDIV:
|
| 4131 |
|
|
case MOD: case UMOD:
|
| 4132 |
|
|
/* We can apply the rules of arithmetic to compute the number of
|
| 4133 |
|
|
high- and low-order zero bits of these operations. We start by
|
| 4134 |
|
|
computing the width (position of the highest-order nonzero bit)
|
| 4135 |
|
|
and the number of low-order zero bits for each value. */
|
| 4136 |
|
|
{
|
| 4137 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nz0
|
| 4138 |
|
|
= cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4139 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4140 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nz1
|
| 4141 |
|
|
= cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
|
| 4142 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4143 |
|
|
int sign_index = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - 1;
|
| 4144 |
|
|
int width0 = floor_log2 (nz0) + 1;
|
| 4145 |
|
|
int width1 = floor_log2 (nz1) + 1;
|
| 4146 |
|
|
int low0 = floor_log2 (nz0 & -nz0);
|
| 4147 |
|
|
int low1 = floor_log2 (nz1 & -nz1);
|
| 4148 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT op0_maybe_minusp
|
| 4149 |
|
|
= nz0 & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << sign_index);
|
| 4150 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT op1_maybe_minusp
|
| 4151 |
|
|
= nz1 & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << sign_index);
|
| 4152 |
|
|
unsigned int result_width = mode_width;
|
| 4153 |
|
|
int result_low = 0;
|
| 4154 |
|
|
|
| 4155 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 4156 |
|
|
{
|
| 4157 |
|
|
case PLUS:
|
| 4158 |
|
|
result_width = MAX (width0, width1) + 1;
|
| 4159 |
|
|
result_low = MIN (low0, low1);
|
| 4160 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4161 |
|
|
case MINUS:
|
| 4162 |
|
|
result_low = MIN (low0, low1);
|
| 4163 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4164 |
|
|
case MULT:
|
| 4165 |
|
|
result_width = width0 + width1;
|
| 4166 |
|
|
result_low = low0 + low1;
|
| 4167 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4168 |
|
|
case DIV:
|
| 4169 |
|
|
if (width1 == 0)
|
| 4170 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4171 |
|
|
if (!op0_maybe_minusp && !op1_maybe_minusp)
|
| 4172 |
|
|
result_width = width0;
|
| 4173 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4174 |
|
|
case UDIV:
|
| 4175 |
|
|
if (width1 == 0)
|
| 4176 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4177 |
|
|
result_width = width0;
|
| 4178 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4179 |
|
|
case MOD:
|
| 4180 |
|
|
if (width1 == 0)
|
| 4181 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4182 |
|
|
if (!op0_maybe_minusp && !op1_maybe_minusp)
|
| 4183 |
|
|
result_width = MIN (width0, width1);
|
| 4184 |
|
|
result_low = MIN (low0, low1);
|
| 4185 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4186 |
|
|
case UMOD:
|
| 4187 |
|
|
if (width1 == 0)
|
| 4188 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4189 |
|
|
result_width = MIN (width0, width1);
|
| 4190 |
|
|
result_low = MIN (low0, low1);
|
| 4191 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4192 |
|
|
default:
|
| 4193 |
|
|
gcc_unreachable ();
|
| 4194 |
|
|
}
|
| 4195 |
|
|
|
| 4196 |
|
|
if (result_width < mode_width)
|
| 4197 |
|
|
nonzero &= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << result_width) - 1;
|
| 4198 |
|
|
|
| 4199 |
|
|
if (result_low > 0)
|
| 4200 |
|
|
nonzero &= ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << result_low) - 1);
|
| 4201 |
|
|
}
|
| 4202 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4203 |
|
|
|
| 4204 |
|
|
case ZERO_EXTRACT:
|
| 4205 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 4206 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
| 4207 |
|
|
nonzero &= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) - 1;
|
| 4208 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4209 |
|
|
|
| 4210 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
| 4211 |
|
|
/* If this is a SUBREG formed for a promoted variable that has
|
| 4212 |
|
|
been zero-extended, we know that at least the high-order bits
|
| 4213 |
|
|
are zero, though others might be too. */
|
| 4214 |
|
|
|
| 4215 |
|
|
if (SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x) && SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x) > 0)
|
| 4216 |
|
|
nonzero = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x))
|
| 4217 |
|
|
& cached_nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (x), GET_MODE (x),
|
| 4218 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4219 |
|
|
|
| 4220 |
|
|
inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
|
| 4221 |
|
|
/* If the inner mode is a single word for both the host and target
|
| 4222 |
|
|
machines, we can compute this from which bits of the inner
|
| 4223 |
|
|
object might be nonzero. */
|
| 4224 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode) <= BITS_PER_WORD
|
| 4225 |
|
|
&& (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT))
|
| 4226 |
|
|
{
|
| 4227 |
|
|
nonzero &= cached_nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (x), mode,
|
| 4228 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4229 |
|
|
|
| 4230 |
|
|
#if defined (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS) && defined (LOAD_EXTEND_OP)
|
| 4231 |
|
|
/* If this is a typical RISC machine, we only have to worry
|
| 4232 |
|
|
about the way loads are extended. */
|
| 4233 |
|
|
if ((LOAD_EXTEND_OP (inner_mode) == SIGN_EXTEND
|
| 4234 |
|
|
? val_signbit_known_set_p (inner_mode, nonzero)
|
| 4235 |
|
|
: LOAD_EXTEND_OP (inner_mode) != ZERO_EXTEND)
|
| 4236 |
|
|
|| !MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
|
| 4237 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4238 |
|
|
{
|
| 4239 |
|
|
/* On many CISC machines, accessing an object in a wider mode
|
| 4240 |
|
|
causes the high-order bits to become undefined. So they are
|
| 4241 |
|
|
not known to be zero. */
|
| 4242 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x))
|
| 4243 |
|
|
> GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode))
|
| 4244 |
|
|
nonzero |= (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x))
|
| 4245 |
|
|
& ~GET_MODE_MASK (inner_mode));
|
| 4246 |
|
|
}
|
| 4247 |
|
|
}
|
| 4248 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4249 |
|
|
|
| 4250 |
|
|
case ASHIFTRT:
|
| 4251 |
|
|
case LSHIFTRT:
|
| 4252 |
|
|
case ASHIFT:
|
| 4253 |
|
|
case ROTATE:
|
| 4254 |
|
|
/* The nonzero bits are in two classes: any bits within MODE
|
| 4255 |
|
|
that aren't in GET_MODE (x) are always significant. The rest of the
|
| 4256 |
|
|
nonzero bits are those that are significant in the operand of
|
| 4257 |
|
|
the shift when shifted the appropriate number of bits. This
|
| 4258 |
|
|
shows that high-order bits are cleared by the right shift and
|
| 4259 |
|
|
low-order bits by left shifts. */
|
| 4260 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 4261 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
|
| 4262 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
| 4263 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 4264 |
|
|
{
|
| 4265 |
|
|
enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (x);
|
| 4266 |
|
|
unsigned int width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode);
|
| 4267 |
|
|
int count = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
|
| 4268 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mode_mask = GET_MODE_MASK (inner_mode);
|
| 4269 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT op_nonzero
|
| 4270 |
|
|
= cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4271 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4272 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT inner = op_nonzero & mode_mask;
|
| 4273 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT outer = 0;
|
| 4274 |
|
|
|
| 4275 |
|
|
if (mode_width > width)
|
| 4276 |
|
|
outer = (op_nonzero & nonzero & ~mode_mask);
|
| 4277 |
|
|
|
| 4278 |
|
|
if (code == LSHIFTRT)
|
| 4279 |
|
|
inner >>= count;
|
| 4280 |
|
|
else if (code == ASHIFTRT)
|
| 4281 |
|
|
{
|
| 4282 |
|
|
inner >>= count;
|
| 4283 |
|
|
|
| 4284 |
|
|
/* If the sign bit may have been nonzero before the shift, we
|
| 4285 |
|
|
need to mark all the places it could have been copied to
|
| 4286 |
|
|
by the shift as possibly nonzero. */
|
| 4287 |
|
|
if (inner & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (width - 1 - count)))
|
| 4288 |
|
|
inner |= (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << count) - 1)
|
| 4289 |
|
|
<< (width - count);
|
| 4290 |
|
|
}
|
| 4291 |
|
|
else if (code == ASHIFT)
|
| 4292 |
|
|
inner <<= count;
|
| 4293 |
|
|
else
|
| 4294 |
|
|
inner = ((inner << (count % width)
|
| 4295 |
|
|
| (inner >> (width - (count % width)))) & mode_mask);
|
| 4296 |
|
|
|
| 4297 |
|
|
nonzero &= (outer | inner);
|
| 4298 |
|
|
}
|
| 4299 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4300 |
|
|
|
| 4301 |
|
|
case FFS:
|
| 4302 |
|
|
case POPCOUNT:
|
| 4303 |
|
|
/* This is at most the number of bits in the mode. */
|
| 4304 |
|
|
nonzero = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 2 << (floor_log2 (mode_width))) - 1;
|
| 4305 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4306 |
|
|
|
| 4307 |
|
|
case CLZ:
|
| 4308 |
|
|
/* If CLZ has a known value at zero, then the nonzero bits are
|
| 4309 |
|
|
that value, plus the number of bits in the mode minus one. */
|
| 4310 |
|
|
if (CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (mode, nonzero))
|
| 4311 |
|
|
nonzero
|
| 4312 |
|
|
|= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (floor_log2 (mode_width))) - 1;
|
| 4313 |
|
|
else
|
| 4314 |
|
|
nonzero = -1;
|
| 4315 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4316 |
|
|
|
| 4317 |
|
|
case CTZ:
|
| 4318 |
|
|
/* If CTZ has a known value at zero, then the nonzero bits are
|
| 4319 |
|
|
that value, plus the number of bits in the mode minus one. */
|
| 4320 |
|
|
if (CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (mode, nonzero))
|
| 4321 |
|
|
nonzero
|
| 4322 |
|
|
|= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (floor_log2 (mode_width))) - 1;
|
| 4323 |
|
|
else
|
| 4324 |
|
|
nonzero = -1;
|
| 4325 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4326 |
|
|
|
| 4327 |
|
|
case CLRSB:
|
| 4328 |
|
|
/* This is at most the number of bits in the mode minus 1. */
|
| 4329 |
|
|
nonzero = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (floor_log2 (mode_width))) - 1;
|
| 4330 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4331 |
|
|
|
| 4332 |
|
|
case PARITY:
|
| 4333 |
|
|
nonzero = 1;
|
| 4334 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4335 |
|
|
|
| 4336 |
|
|
case IF_THEN_ELSE:
|
| 4337 |
|
|
{
|
| 4338 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero_true
|
| 4339 |
|
|
= cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
|
| 4340 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4341 |
|
|
|
| 4342 |
|
|
/* Don't call nonzero_bits for the second time if it cannot change
|
| 4343 |
|
|
anything. */
|
| 4344 |
|
|
if ((nonzero & nonzero_true) != nonzero)
|
| 4345 |
|
|
nonzero &= nonzero_true
|
| 4346 |
|
|
| cached_nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 2), mode,
|
| 4347 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4348 |
|
|
}
|
| 4349 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4350 |
|
|
|
| 4351 |
|
|
default:
|
| 4352 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4353 |
|
|
}
|
| 4354 |
|
|
|
| 4355 |
|
|
return nonzero;
|
| 4356 |
|
|
}
|
| 4357 |
|
|
|
| 4358 |
|
|
/* See the macro definition above. */
|
| 4359 |
|
|
#undef cached_num_sign_bit_copies
|
| 4360 |
|
|
|
| 4361 |
|
|
|
| 4362 |
|
|
/* The function cached_num_sign_bit_copies is a wrapper around
|
| 4363 |
|
|
num_sign_bit_copies1. It avoids exponential behavior in
|
| 4364 |
|
|
num_sign_bit_copies1 when X has identical subexpressions on the
|
| 4365 |
|
|
first or the second level. */
|
| 4366 |
|
|
|
| 4367 |
|
|
static unsigned int
|
| 4368 |
|
|
cached_num_sign_bit_copies (const_rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, const_rtx known_x,
|
| 4369 |
|
|
enum machine_mode known_mode,
|
| 4370 |
|
|
unsigned int known_ret)
|
| 4371 |
|
|
{
|
| 4372 |
|
|
if (x == known_x && mode == known_mode)
|
| 4373 |
|
|
return known_ret;
|
| 4374 |
|
|
|
| 4375 |
|
|
/* Try to find identical subexpressions. If found call
|
| 4376 |
|
|
num_sign_bit_copies1 on X with the subexpressions as KNOWN_X and
|
| 4377 |
|
|
the precomputed value for the subexpression as KNOWN_RET. */
|
| 4378 |
|
|
|
| 4379 |
|
|
if (ARITHMETIC_P (x))
|
| 4380 |
|
|
{
|
| 4381 |
|
|
rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
|
| 4382 |
|
|
rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
|
| 4383 |
|
|
|
| 4384 |
|
|
/* Check the first level. */
|
| 4385 |
|
|
if (x0 == x1)
|
| 4386 |
|
|
return
|
| 4387 |
|
|
num_sign_bit_copies1 (x, mode, x0, mode,
|
| 4388 |
|
|
cached_num_sign_bit_copies (x0, mode, known_x,
|
| 4389 |
|
|
known_mode,
|
| 4390 |
|
|
known_ret));
|
| 4391 |
|
|
|
| 4392 |
|
|
/* Check the second level. */
|
| 4393 |
|
|
if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0)
|
| 4394 |
|
|
&& (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
|
| 4395 |
|
|
return
|
| 4396 |
|
|
num_sign_bit_copies1 (x, mode, x1, mode,
|
| 4397 |
|
|
cached_num_sign_bit_copies (x1, mode, known_x,
|
| 4398 |
|
|
known_mode,
|
| 4399 |
|
|
known_ret));
|
| 4400 |
|
|
|
| 4401 |
|
|
if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1)
|
| 4402 |
|
|
&& (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
|
| 4403 |
|
|
return
|
| 4404 |
|
|
num_sign_bit_copies1 (x, mode, x0, mode,
|
| 4405 |
|
|
cached_num_sign_bit_copies (x0, mode, known_x,
|
| 4406 |
|
|
known_mode,
|
| 4407 |
|
|
known_ret));
|
| 4408 |
|
|
}
|
| 4409 |
|
|
|
| 4410 |
|
|
return num_sign_bit_copies1 (x, mode, known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4411 |
|
|
}
|
| 4412 |
|
|
|
| 4413 |
|
|
/* Return the number of bits at the high-order end of X that are known to
|
| 4414 |
|
|
be equal to the sign bit. X will be used in mode MODE; if MODE is
|
| 4415 |
|
|
VOIDmode, X will be used in its own mode. The returned value will always
|
| 4416 |
|
|
be between 1 and the number of bits in MODE. */
|
| 4417 |
|
|
|
| 4418 |
|
|
static unsigned int
|
| 4419 |
|
|
num_sign_bit_copies1 (const_rtx x, enum machine_mode mode, const_rtx known_x,
|
| 4420 |
|
|
enum machine_mode known_mode,
|
| 4421 |
|
|
unsigned int known_ret)
|
| 4422 |
|
|
{
|
| 4423 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 4424 |
|
|
unsigned int bitwidth = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
|
| 4425 |
|
|
int num0, num1, result;
|
| 4426 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero;
|
| 4427 |
|
|
|
| 4428 |
|
|
/* If we weren't given a mode, use the mode of X. If the mode is still
|
| 4429 |
|
|
VOIDmode, we don't know anything. Likewise if one of the modes is
|
| 4430 |
|
|
floating-point. */
|
| 4431 |
|
|
|
| 4432 |
|
|
if (mode == VOIDmode)
|
| 4433 |
|
|
mode = GET_MODE (x);
|
| 4434 |
|
|
|
| 4435 |
|
|
if (mode == VOIDmode || FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
|
| 4436 |
|
|
|| VECTOR_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)) || VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
|
| 4437 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 4438 |
|
|
|
| 4439 |
|
|
/* For a smaller object, just ignore the high bits. */
|
| 4440 |
|
|
if (bitwidth < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 4441 |
|
|
{
|
| 4442 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (x, GET_MODE (x),
|
| 4443 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4444 |
|
|
return MAX (1,
|
| 4445 |
|
|
num0 - (int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - bitwidth));
|
| 4446 |
|
|
}
|
| 4447 |
|
|
|
| 4448 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode && bitwidth > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 4449 |
|
|
{
|
| 4450 |
|
|
#ifndef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
|
| 4451 |
|
|
/* If this machine does not do all register operations on the entire
|
| 4452 |
|
|
register and MODE is wider than the mode of X, we can say nothing
|
| 4453 |
|
|
at all about the high-order bits. */
|
| 4454 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 4455 |
|
|
#else
|
| 4456 |
|
|
/* Likewise on machines that do, if the mode of the object is smaller
|
| 4457 |
|
|
than a word and loads of that size don't sign extend, we can say
|
| 4458 |
|
|
nothing about the high order bits. */
|
| 4459 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) < BITS_PER_WORD
|
| 4460 |
|
|
#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
|
| 4461 |
|
|
&& LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (x)) != SIGN_EXTEND
|
| 4462 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4463 |
|
|
)
|
| 4464 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 4465 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4466 |
|
|
}
|
| 4467 |
|
|
|
| 4468 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 4469 |
|
|
{
|
| 4470 |
|
|
case REG:
|
| 4471 |
|
|
|
| 4472 |
|
|
#if defined(POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED) && !defined(HAVE_ptr_extend)
|
| 4473 |
|
|
/* If pointers extend signed and this is a pointer in Pmode, say that
|
| 4474 |
|
|
all the bits above ptr_mode are known to be sign bit copies. */
|
| 4475 |
|
|
/* As we do not know which address space the pointer is refering to,
|
| 4476 |
|
|
we can do this only if the target does not support different pointer
|
| 4477 |
|
|
or address modes depending on the address space. */
|
| 4478 |
|
|
if (target_default_pointer_address_modes_p ()
|
| 4479 |
|
|
&& ! POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED && GET_MODE (x) == Pmode
|
| 4480 |
|
|
&& mode == Pmode && REG_POINTER (x))
|
| 4481 |
|
|
return GET_MODE_PRECISION (Pmode) - GET_MODE_PRECISION (ptr_mode) + 1;
|
| 4482 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4483 |
|
|
|
| 4484 |
|
|
{
|
| 4485 |
|
|
unsigned int copies_for_hook = 1, copies = 1;
|
| 4486 |
|
|
rtx new_rtx = rtl_hooks.reg_num_sign_bit_copies (x, mode, known_x,
|
| 4487 |
|
|
known_mode, known_ret,
|
| 4488 |
|
|
&copies_for_hook);
|
| 4489 |
|
|
|
| 4490 |
|
|
if (new_rtx)
|
| 4491 |
|
|
copies = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (new_rtx, mode, known_x,
|
| 4492 |
|
|
known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4493 |
|
|
|
| 4494 |
|
|
if (copies > 1 || copies_for_hook > 1)
|
| 4495 |
|
|
return MAX (copies, copies_for_hook);
|
| 4496 |
|
|
|
| 4497 |
|
|
/* Else, use nonzero_bits to guess num_sign_bit_copies (see below). */
|
| 4498 |
|
|
}
|
| 4499 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4500 |
|
|
|
| 4501 |
|
|
case MEM:
|
| 4502 |
|
|
#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
|
| 4503 |
|
|
/* Some RISC machines sign-extend all loads of smaller than a word. */
|
| 4504 |
|
|
if (LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (x)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
|
| 4505 |
|
|
return MAX (1, ((int) bitwidth
|
| 4506 |
|
|
- (int) GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) + 1));
|
| 4507 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4508 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4509 |
|
|
|
| 4510 |
|
|
case CONST_INT:
|
| 4511 |
|
|
/* If the constant is negative, take its 1's complement and remask.
|
| 4512 |
|
|
Then see how many zero bits we have. */
|
| 4513 |
|
|
nonzero = UINTVAL (x) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
|
| 4514 |
|
|
if (bitwidth <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
| 4515 |
|
|
&& (nonzero & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0)
|
| 4516 |
|
|
nonzero = (~nonzero) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
|
| 4517 |
|
|
|
| 4518 |
|
|
return (nonzero == 0 ? bitwidth : bitwidth - floor_log2 (nonzero) - 1);
|
| 4519 |
|
|
|
| 4520 |
|
|
case SUBREG:
|
| 4521 |
|
|
/* If this is a SUBREG for a promoted object that is sign-extended
|
| 4522 |
|
|
and we are looking at it in a wider mode, we know that at least the
|
| 4523 |
|
|
high-order bits are known to be sign bit copies. */
|
| 4524 |
|
|
|
| 4525 |
|
|
if (SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x) && ! SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (x))
|
| 4526 |
|
|
{
|
| 4527 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (SUBREG_REG (x), mode,
|
| 4528 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4529 |
|
|
return MAX ((int) bitwidth
|
| 4530 |
|
|
- (int) GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) + 1,
|
| 4531 |
|
|
num0);
|
| 4532 |
|
|
}
|
| 4533 |
|
|
|
| 4534 |
|
|
/* For a smaller object, just ignore the high bits. */
|
| 4535 |
|
|
if (bitwidth <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
|
| 4536 |
|
|
{
|
| 4537 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (SUBREG_REG (x), VOIDmode,
|
| 4538 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4539 |
|
|
return MAX (1, (num0
|
| 4540 |
|
|
- (int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))
|
| 4541 |
|
|
- bitwidth)));
|
| 4542 |
|
|
}
|
| 4543 |
|
|
|
| 4544 |
|
|
#ifdef WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
|
| 4545 |
|
|
#ifdef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
|
| 4546 |
|
|
/* For paradoxical SUBREGs on machines where all register operations
|
| 4547 |
|
|
affect the entire register, just look inside. Note that we are
|
| 4548 |
|
|
passing MODE to the recursive call, so the number of sign bit copies
|
| 4549 |
|
|
will remain relative to that mode, not the inner mode. */
|
| 4550 |
|
|
|
| 4551 |
|
|
/* This works only if loads sign extend. Otherwise, if we get a
|
| 4552 |
|
|
reload for the inner part, it may be loaded from the stack, and
|
| 4553 |
|
|
then we lose all sign bit copies that existed before the store
|
| 4554 |
|
|
to the stack. */
|
| 4555 |
|
|
|
| 4556 |
|
|
if (paradoxical_subreg_p (x)
|
| 4557 |
|
|
&& LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) == SIGN_EXTEND
|
| 4558 |
|
|
&& MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
|
| 4559 |
|
|
return cached_num_sign_bit_copies (SUBREG_REG (x), mode,
|
| 4560 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4561 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4562 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4563 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4564 |
|
|
|
| 4565 |
|
|
case SIGN_EXTRACT:
|
| 4566 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
|
| 4567 |
|
|
return MAX (1, (int) bitwidth - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
|
| 4568 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4569 |
|
|
|
| 4570 |
|
|
case SIGN_EXTEND:
|
| 4571 |
|
|
return (bitwidth - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
|
| 4572 |
|
|
+ cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), VOIDmode,
|
| 4573 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret));
|
| 4574 |
|
|
|
| 4575 |
|
|
case TRUNCATE:
|
| 4576 |
|
|
/* For a smaller object, just ignore the high bits. */
|
| 4577 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), VOIDmode,
|
| 4578 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4579 |
|
|
return MAX (1, (num0 - (int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
|
| 4580 |
|
|
- bitwidth)));
|
| 4581 |
|
|
|
| 4582 |
|
|
case NOT:
|
| 4583 |
|
|
return cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4584 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4585 |
|
|
|
| 4586 |
|
|
case ROTATE: case ROTATERT:
|
| 4587 |
|
|
/* If we are rotating left by a number of bits less than the number
|
| 4588 |
|
|
of sign bit copies, we can just subtract that amount from the
|
| 4589 |
|
|
number. */
|
| 4590 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 4591 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
|
| 4592 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < (int) bitwidth)
|
| 4593 |
|
|
{
|
| 4594 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4595 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4596 |
|
|
return MAX (1, num0 - (code == ROTATE ? INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 4597 |
|
|
: (int) bitwidth - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))));
|
| 4598 |
|
|
}
|
| 4599 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4600 |
|
|
|
| 4601 |
|
|
case NEG:
|
| 4602 |
|
|
/* In general, this subtracts one sign bit copy. But if the value
|
| 4603 |
|
|
is known to be positive, the number of sign bit copies is the
|
| 4604 |
|
|
same as that of the input. Finally, if the input has just one bit
|
| 4605 |
|
|
that might be nonzero, all the bits are copies of the sign bit. */
|
| 4606 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4607 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4608 |
|
|
if (bitwidth > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
| 4609 |
|
|
return num0 > 1 ? num0 - 1 : 1;
|
| 4610 |
|
|
|
| 4611 |
|
|
nonzero = nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode);
|
| 4612 |
|
|
if (nonzero == 1)
|
| 4613 |
|
|
return bitwidth;
|
| 4614 |
|
|
|
| 4615 |
|
|
if (num0 > 1
|
| 4616 |
|
|
&& (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1)) & nonzero))
|
| 4617 |
|
|
num0--;
|
| 4618 |
|
|
|
| 4619 |
|
|
return num0;
|
| 4620 |
|
|
|
| 4621 |
|
|
case IOR: case AND: case XOR:
|
| 4622 |
|
|
case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX:
|
| 4623 |
|
|
/* Logical operations will preserve the number of sign-bit copies.
|
| 4624 |
|
|
MIN and MAX operations always return one of the operands. */
|
| 4625 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4626 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4627 |
|
|
num1 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
|
| 4628 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4629 |
|
|
|
| 4630 |
|
|
/* If num1 is clearing some of the top bits then regardless of
|
| 4631 |
|
|
the other term, we are guaranteed to have at least that many
|
| 4632 |
|
|
high-order zero bits. */
|
| 4633 |
|
|
if (code == AND
|
| 4634 |
|
|
&& num1 > 1
|
| 4635 |
|
|
&& bitwidth <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
| 4636 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 4637 |
|
|
&& (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 4638 |
|
|
& ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) == 0)
|
| 4639 |
|
|
return num1;
|
| 4640 |
|
|
|
| 4641 |
|
|
/* Similarly for IOR when setting high-order bits. */
|
| 4642 |
|
|
if (code == IOR
|
| 4643 |
|
|
&& num1 > 1
|
| 4644 |
|
|
&& bitwidth <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
| 4645 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 4646 |
|
|
&& (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 4647 |
|
|
& ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0)
|
| 4648 |
|
|
return num1;
|
| 4649 |
|
|
|
| 4650 |
|
|
return MIN (num0, num1);
|
| 4651 |
|
|
|
| 4652 |
|
|
case PLUS: case MINUS:
|
| 4653 |
|
|
/* For addition and subtraction, we can have a 1-bit carry. However,
|
| 4654 |
|
|
if we are subtracting 1 from a positive number, there will not
|
| 4655 |
|
|
be such a carry. Furthermore, if the positive number is known to
|
| 4656 |
|
|
be 0 or 1, we know the result is either -1 or 0. */
|
| 4657 |
|
|
|
| 4658 |
|
|
if (code == PLUS && XEXP (x, 1) == constm1_rtx
|
| 4659 |
|
|
&& bitwidth <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
| 4660 |
|
|
{
|
| 4661 |
|
|
nonzero = nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode);
|
| 4662 |
|
|
if ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1)) & nonzero) == 0)
|
| 4663 |
|
|
return (nonzero == 1 || nonzero == 0 ? bitwidth
|
| 4664 |
|
|
: bitwidth - floor_log2 (nonzero) - 1);
|
| 4665 |
|
|
}
|
| 4666 |
|
|
|
| 4667 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4668 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4669 |
|
|
num1 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
|
| 4670 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4671 |
|
|
result = MAX (1, MIN (num0, num1) - 1);
|
| 4672 |
|
|
|
| 4673 |
|
|
return result;
|
| 4674 |
|
|
|
| 4675 |
|
|
case MULT:
|
| 4676 |
|
|
/* The number of bits of the product is the sum of the number of
|
| 4677 |
|
|
bits of both terms. However, unless one of the terms if known
|
| 4678 |
|
|
to be positive, we must allow for an additional bit since negating
|
| 4679 |
|
|
a negative number can remove one sign bit copy. */
|
| 4680 |
|
|
|
| 4681 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4682 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4683 |
|
|
num1 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
|
| 4684 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4685 |
|
|
|
| 4686 |
|
|
result = bitwidth - (bitwidth - num0) - (bitwidth - num1);
|
| 4687 |
|
|
if (result > 0
|
| 4688 |
|
|
&& (bitwidth > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
| 4689 |
|
|
|| (((nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode)
|
| 4690 |
|
|
& ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0)
|
| 4691 |
|
|
&& ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode)
|
| 4692 |
|
|
& ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1)))
|
| 4693 |
|
|
!= 0))))
|
| 4694 |
|
|
result--;
|
| 4695 |
|
|
|
| 4696 |
|
|
return MAX (1, result);
|
| 4697 |
|
|
|
| 4698 |
|
|
case UDIV:
|
| 4699 |
|
|
/* The result must be <= the first operand. If the first operand
|
| 4700 |
|
|
has the high bit set, we know nothing about the number of sign
|
| 4701 |
|
|
bit copies. */
|
| 4702 |
|
|
if (bitwidth > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
| 4703 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 4704 |
|
|
else if ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode)
|
| 4705 |
|
|
& ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0)
|
| 4706 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 4707 |
|
|
else
|
| 4708 |
|
|
return cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4709 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4710 |
|
|
|
| 4711 |
|
|
case UMOD:
|
| 4712 |
|
|
/* The result must be <= the second operand. If the second operand
|
| 4713 |
|
|
has (or just might have) the high bit set, we know nothing about
|
| 4714 |
|
|
the number of sign bit copies. */
|
| 4715 |
|
|
if (bitwidth > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
| 4716 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 4717 |
|
|
else if ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode)
|
| 4718 |
|
|
& ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0)
|
| 4719 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 4720 |
|
|
else
|
| 4721 |
|
|
return cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
|
| 4722 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4723 |
|
|
|
| 4724 |
|
|
case DIV:
|
| 4725 |
|
|
/* Similar to unsigned division, except that we have to worry about
|
| 4726 |
|
|
the case where the divisor is negative, in which case we have
|
| 4727 |
|
|
to add 1. */
|
| 4728 |
|
|
result = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4729 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4730 |
|
|
if (result > 1
|
| 4731 |
|
|
&& (bitwidth > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
| 4732 |
|
|
|| (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode)
|
| 4733 |
|
|
& ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0))
|
| 4734 |
|
|
result--;
|
| 4735 |
|
|
|
| 4736 |
|
|
return result;
|
| 4737 |
|
|
|
| 4738 |
|
|
case MOD:
|
| 4739 |
|
|
result = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
|
| 4740 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4741 |
|
|
if (result > 1
|
| 4742 |
|
|
&& (bitwidth > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
| 4743 |
|
|
|| (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode)
|
| 4744 |
|
|
& ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0))
|
| 4745 |
|
|
result--;
|
| 4746 |
|
|
|
| 4747 |
|
|
return result;
|
| 4748 |
|
|
|
| 4749 |
|
|
case ASHIFTRT:
|
| 4750 |
|
|
/* Shifts by a constant add to the number of bits equal to the
|
| 4751 |
|
|
sign bit. */
|
| 4752 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4753 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4754 |
|
|
if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 4755 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) > 0
|
| 4756 |
|
|
&& INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 4757 |
|
|
num0 = MIN ((int) bitwidth, num0 + INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
|
| 4758 |
|
|
|
| 4759 |
|
|
return num0;
|
| 4760 |
|
|
|
| 4761 |
|
|
case ASHIFT:
|
| 4762 |
|
|
/* Left shifts destroy copies. */
|
| 4763 |
|
|
if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
|
| 4764 |
|
|
|| INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < 0
|
| 4765 |
|
|
|| INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= (int) bitwidth
|
| 4766 |
|
|
|| INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
|
| 4767 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 4768 |
|
|
|
| 4769 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), mode,
|
| 4770 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4771 |
|
|
return MAX (1, num0 - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
|
| 4772 |
|
|
|
| 4773 |
|
|
case IF_THEN_ELSE:
|
| 4774 |
|
|
num0 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
|
| 4775 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4776 |
|
|
num1 = cached_num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 2), mode,
|
| 4777 |
|
|
known_x, known_mode, known_ret);
|
| 4778 |
|
|
return MIN (num0, num1);
|
| 4779 |
|
|
|
| 4780 |
|
|
case EQ: case NE: case GE: case GT: case LE: case LT:
|
| 4781 |
|
|
case UNEQ: case LTGT: case UNGE: case UNGT: case UNLE: case UNLT:
|
| 4782 |
|
|
case GEU: case GTU: case LEU: case LTU:
|
| 4783 |
|
|
case UNORDERED: case ORDERED:
|
| 4784 |
|
|
/* If the constant is negative, take its 1's complement and remask.
|
| 4785 |
|
|
Then see how many zero bits we have. */
|
| 4786 |
|
|
nonzero = STORE_FLAG_VALUE;
|
| 4787 |
|
|
if (bitwidth <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
|
| 4788 |
|
|
&& (nonzero & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))) != 0)
|
| 4789 |
|
|
nonzero = (~nonzero) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
|
| 4790 |
|
|
|
| 4791 |
|
|
return (nonzero == 0 ? bitwidth : bitwidth - floor_log2 (nonzero) - 1);
|
| 4792 |
|
|
|
| 4793 |
|
|
default:
|
| 4794 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4795 |
|
|
}
|
| 4796 |
|
|
|
| 4797 |
|
|
/* If we haven't been able to figure it out by one of the above rules,
|
| 4798 |
|
|
see if some of the high-order bits are known to be zero. If so,
|
| 4799 |
|
|
count those bits and return one less than that amount. If we can't
|
| 4800 |
|
|
safely compute the mask for this mode, always return BITWIDTH. */
|
| 4801 |
|
|
|
| 4802 |
|
|
bitwidth = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
|
| 4803 |
|
|
if (bitwidth > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
| 4804 |
|
|
return 1;
|
| 4805 |
|
|
|
| 4806 |
|
|
nonzero = nonzero_bits (x, mode);
|
| 4807 |
|
|
return nonzero & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (bitwidth - 1))
|
| 4808 |
|
|
? 1 : bitwidth - floor_log2 (nonzero) - 1;
|
| 4809 |
|
|
}
|
| 4810 |
|
|
|
| 4811 |
|
|
/* Calculate the rtx_cost of a single instruction. A return value of
|
| 4812 |
|
|
zero indicates an instruction pattern without a known cost. */
|
| 4813 |
|
|
|
| 4814 |
|
|
int
|
| 4815 |
|
|
insn_rtx_cost (rtx pat, bool speed)
|
| 4816 |
|
|
{
|
| 4817 |
|
|
int i, cost;
|
| 4818 |
|
|
rtx set;
|
| 4819 |
|
|
|
| 4820 |
|
|
/* Extract the single set rtx from the instruction pattern.
|
| 4821 |
|
|
We can't use single_set since we only have the pattern. */
|
| 4822 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET)
|
| 4823 |
|
|
set = pat;
|
| 4824 |
|
|
else if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
|
| 4825 |
|
|
{
|
| 4826 |
|
|
set = NULL_RTX;
|
| 4827 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
|
| 4828 |
|
|
{
|
| 4829 |
|
|
rtx x = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
|
| 4830 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
|
| 4831 |
|
|
{
|
| 4832 |
|
|
if (set)
|
| 4833 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 4834 |
|
|
set = x;
|
| 4835 |
|
|
}
|
| 4836 |
|
|
}
|
| 4837 |
|
|
if (!set)
|
| 4838 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 4839 |
|
|
}
|
| 4840 |
|
|
else
|
| 4841 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 4842 |
|
|
|
| 4843 |
|
|
cost = set_src_cost (SET_SRC (set), speed);
|
| 4844 |
|
|
return cost > 0 ? cost : COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
|
| 4845 |
|
|
}
|
| 4846 |
|
|
|
| 4847 |
|
|
/* Given an insn INSN and condition COND, return the condition in a
|
| 4848 |
|
|
canonical form to simplify testing by callers. Specifically:
|
| 4849 |
|
|
|
| 4850 |
|
|
(1) The code will always be a comparison operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.).
|
| 4851 |
|
|
(2) Both operands will be machine operands; (cc0) will have been replaced.
|
| 4852 |
|
|
(3) If an operand is a constant, it will be the second operand.
|
| 4853 |
|
|
(4) (LE x const) will be replaced with (LT x <const+1>) and similarly
|
| 4854 |
|
|
for GE, GEU, and LEU.
|
| 4855 |
|
|
|
| 4856 |
|
|
If the condition cannot be understood, or is an inequality floating-point
|
| 4857 |
|
|
comparison which needs to be reversed, 0 will be returned.
|
| 4858 |
|
|
|
| 4859 |
|
|
If REVERSE is nonzero, then reverse the condition prior to canonizing it.
|
| 4860 |
|
|
|
| 4861 |
|
|
If EARLIEST is nonzero, it is a pointer to a place where the earliest
|
| 4862 |
|
|
insn used in locating the condition was found. If a replacement test
|
| 4863 |
|
|
of the condition is desired, it should be placed in front of that
|
| 4864 |
|
|
insn and we will be sure that the inputs are still valid.
|
| 4865 |
|
|
|
| 4866 |
|
|
If WANT_REG is nonzero, we wish the condition to be relative to that
|
| 4867 |
|
|
register, if possible. Therefore, do not canonicalize the condition
|
| 4868 |
|
|
further. If ALLOW_CC_MODE is nonzero, allow the condition returned
|
| 4869 |
|
|
to be a compare to a CC mode register.
|
| 4870 |
|
|
|
| 4871 |
|
|
If VALID_AT_INSN_P, the condition must be valid at both *EARLIEST
|
| 4872 |
|
|
and at INSN. */
|
| 4873 |
|
|
|
| 4874 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 4875 |
|
|
canonicalize_condition (rtx insn, rtx cond, int reverse, rtx *earliest,
|
| 4876 |
|
|
rtx want_reg, int allow_cc_mode, int valid_at_insn_p)
|
| 4877 |
|
|
{
|
| 4878 |
|
|
enum rtx_code code;
|
| 4879 |
|
|
rtx prev = insn;
|
| 4880 |
|
|
const_rtx set;
|
| 4881 |
|
|
rtx tem;
|
| 4882 |
|
|
rtx op0, op1;
|
| 4883 |
|
|
int reverse_code = 0;
|
| 4884 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode;
|
| 4885 |
|
|
basic_block bb = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn);
|
| 4886 |
|
|
|
| 4887 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (cond);
|
| 4888 |
|
|
mode = GET_MODE (cond);
|
| 4889 |
|
|
op0 = XEXP (cond, 0);
|
| 4890 |
|
|
op1 = XEXP (cond, 1);
|
| 4891 |
|
|
|
| 4892 |
|
|
if (reverse)
|
| 4893 |
|
|
code = reversed_comparison_code (cond, insn);
|
| 4894 |
|
|
if (code == UNKNOWN)
|
| 4895 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 4896 |
|
|
|
| 4897 |
|
|
if (earliest)
|
| 4898 |
|
|
*earliest = insn;
|
| 4899 |
|
|
|
| 4900 |
|
|
/* If we are comparing a register with zero, see if the register is set
|
| 4901 |
|
|
in the previous insn to a COMPARE or a comparison operation. Perform
|
| 4902 |
|
|
the same tests as a function of STORE_FLAG_VALUE as find_comparison_args
|
| 4903 |
|
|
in cse.c */
|
| 4904 |
|
|
|
| 4905 |
|
|
while ((GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMPARE
|
| 4906 |
|
|
|| GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMM_COMPARE)
|
| 4907 |
|
|
&& op1 == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (op0))
|
| 4908 |
|
|
&& op0 != want_reg)
|
| 4909 |
|
|
{
|
| 4910 |
|
|
/* Set nonzero when we find something of interest. */
|
| 4911 |
|
|
rtx x = 0;
|
| 4912 |
|
|
|
| 4913 |
|
|
#ifdef HAVE_cc0
|
| 4914 |
|
|
/* If comparison with cc0, import actual comparison from compare
|
| 4915 |
|
|
insn. */
|
| 4916 |
|
|
if (op0 == cc0_rtx)
|
| 4917 |
|
|
{
|
| 4918 |
|
|
if ((prev = prev_nonnote_insn (prev)) == 0
|
| 4919 |
|
|
|| !NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
|
| 4920 |
|
|
|| (set = single_set (prev)) == 0
|
| 4921 |
|
|
|| SET_DEST (set) != cc0_rtx)
|
| 4922 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 4923 |
|
|
|
| 4924 |
|
|
op0 = SET_SRC (set);
|
| 4925 |
|
|
op1 = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (op0));
|
| 4926 |
|
|
if (earliest)
|
| 4927 |
|
|
*earliest = prev;
|
| 4928 |
|
|
}
|
| 4929 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4930 |
|
|
|
| 4931 |
|
|
/* If this is a COMPARE, pick up the two things being compared. */
|
| 4932 |
|
|
if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE)
|
| 4933 |
|
|
{
|
| 4934 |
|
|
op1 = XEXP (op0, 1);
|
| 4935 |
|
|
op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
|
| 4936 |
|
|
continue;
|
| 4937 |
|
|
}
|
| 4938 |
|
|
else if (!REG_P (op0))
|
| 4939 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4940 |
|
|
|
| 4941 |
|
|
/* Go back to the previous insn. Stop if it is not an INSN. We also
|
| 4942 |
|
|
stop if it isn't a single set or if it has a REG_INC note because
|
| 4943 |
|
|
we don't want to bother dealing with it. */
|
| 4944 |
|
|
|
| 4945 |
|
|
prev = prev_nonnote_nondebug_insn (prev);
|
| 4946 |
|
|
|
| 4947 |
|
|
if (prev == 0
|
| 4948 |
|
|
|| !NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
|
| 4949 |
|
|
|| FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (prev, NULL_RTX)
|
| 4950 |
|
|
/* In cfglayout mode, there do not have to be labels at the
|
| 4951 |
|
|
beginning of a block, or jumps at the end, so the previous
|
| 4952 |
|
|
conditions would not stop us when we reach bb boundary. */
|
| 4953 |
|
|
|| BLOCK_FOR_INSN (prev) != bb)
|
| 4954 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4955 |
|
|
|
| 4956 |
|
|
set = set_of (op0, prev);
|
| 4957 |
|
|
|
| 4958 |
|
|
if (set
|
| 4959 |
|
|
&& (GET_CODE (set) != SET
|
| 4960 |
|
|
|| !rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (set), op0)))
|
| 4961 |
|
|
break;
|
| 4962 |
|
|
|
| 4963 |
|
|
/* If this is setting OP0, get what it sets it to if it looks
|
| 4964 |
|
|
relevant. */
|
| 4965 |
|
|
if (set)
|
| 4966 |
|
|
{
|
| 4967 |
|
|
enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set));
|
| 4968 |
|
|
#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
| 4969 |
|
|
REAL_VALUE_TYPE fsfv;
|
| 4970 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4971 |
|
|
|
| 4972 |
|
|
/* ??? We may not combine comparisons done in a CCmode with
|
| 4973 |
|
|
comparisons not done in a CCmode. This is to aid targets
|
| 4974 |
|
|
like Alpha that have an IEEE compliant EQ instruction, and
|
| 4975 |
|
|
a non-IEEE compliant BEQ instruction. The use of CCmode is
|
| 4976 |
|
|
actually artificial, simply to prevent the combination, but
|
| 4977 |
|
|
should not affect other platforms.
|
| 4978 |
|
|
|
| 4979 |
|
|
However, we must allow VOIDmode comparisons to match either
|
| 4980 |
|
|
CCmode or non-CCmode comparison, because some ports have
|
| 4981 |
|
|
modeless comparisons inside branch patterns.
|
| 4982 |
|
|
|
| 4983 |
|
|
??? This mode check should perhaps look more like the mode check
|
| 4984 |
|
|
in simplify_comparison in combine. */
|
| 4985 |
|
|
|
| 4986 |
|
|
if ((GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set)) == COMPARE
|
| 4987 |
|
|
|| (((code == NE
|
| 4988 |
|
|
|| (code == LT
|
| 4989 |
|
|
&& val_signbit_known_set_p (inner_mode,
|
| 4990 |
|
|
STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
|
| 4991 |
|
|
#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
| 4992 |
|
|
|| (code == LT
|
| 4993 |
|
|
&& SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (inner_mode)
|
| 4994 |
|
|
&& (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (inner_mode),
|
| 4995 |
|
|
REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
|
| 4996 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 4997 |
|
|
))
|
| 4998 |
|
|
&& COMPARISON_P (SET_SRC (set))))
|
| 4999 |
|
|
&& (((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC)
|
| 5000 |
|
|
== (GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_CC))
|
| 5001 |
|
|
|| mode == VOIDmode || inner_mode == VOIDmode))
|
| 5002 |
|
|
x = SET_SRC (set);
|
| 5003 |
|
|
else if (((code == EQ
|
| 5004 |
|
|
|| (code == GE
|
| 5005 |
|
|
&& val_signbit_known_set_p (inner_mode,
|
| 5006 |
|
|
STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
|
| 5007 |
|
|
#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
|
| 5008 |
|
|
|| (code == GE
|
| 5009 |
|
|
&& SCALAR_FLOAT_MODE_P (inner_mode)
|
| 5010 |
|
|
&& (fsfv = FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (inner_mode),
|
| 5011 |
|
|
REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (fsfv)))
|
| 5012 |
|
|
#endif
|
| 5013 |
|
|
))
|
| 5014 |
|
|
&& COMPARISON_P (SET_SRC (set))
|
| 5015 |
|
|
&& (((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC)
|
| 5016 |
|
|
== (GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_CC))
|
| 5017 |
|
|
|| mode == VOIDmode || inner_mode == VOIDmode))
|
| 5018 |
|
|
|
| 5019 |
|
|
{
|
| 5020 |
|
|
reverse_code = 1;
|
| 5021 |
|
|
x = SET_SRC (set);
|
| 5022 |
|
|
}
|
| 5023 |
|
|
else
|
| 5024 |
|
|
break;
|
| 5025 |
|
|
}
|
| 5026 |
|
|
|
| 5027 |
|
|
else if (reg_set_p (op0, prev))
|
| 5028 |
|
|
/* If this sets OP0, but not directly, we have to give up. */
|
| 5029 |
|
|
break;
|
| 5030 |
|
|
|
| 5031 |
|
|
if (x)
|
| 5032 |
|
|
{
|
| 5033 |
|
|
/* If the caller is expecting the condition to be valid at INSN,
|
| 5034 |
|
|
make sure X doesn't change before INSN. */
|
| 5035 |
|
|
if (valid_at_insn_p)
|
| 5036 |
|
|
if (modified_in_p (x, prev) || modified_between_p (x, prev, insn))
|
| 5037 |
|
|
break;
|
| 5038 |
|
|
if (COMPARISON_P (x))
|
| 5039 |
|
|
code = GET_CODE (x);
|
| 5040 |
|
|
if (reverse_code)
|
| 5041 |
|
|
{
|
| 5042 |
|
|
code = reversed_comparison_code (x, prev);
|
| 5043 |
|
|
if (code == UNKNOWN)
|
| 5044 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 5045 |
|
|
reverse_code = 0;
|
| 5046 |
|
|
}
|
| 5047 |
|
|
|
| 5048 |
|
|
op0 = XEXP (x, 0), op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
|
| 5049 |
|
|
if (earliest)
|
| 5050 |
|
|
*earliest = prev;
|
| 5051 |
|
|
}
|
| 5052 |
|
|
}
|
| 5053 |
|
|
|
| 5054 |
|
|
/* If constant is first, put it last. */
|
| 5055 |
|
|
if (CONSTANT_P (op0))
|
| 5056 |
|
|
code = swap_condition (code), tem = op0, op0 = op1, op1 = tem;
|
| 5057 |
|
|
|
| 5058 |
|
|
/* If OP0 is the result of a comparison, we weren't able to find what
|
| 5059 |
|
|
was really being compared, so fail. */
|
| 5060 |
|
|
if (!allow_cc_mode
|
| 5061 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_CC)
|
| 5062 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 5063 |
|
|
|
| 5064 |
|
|
/* Canonicalize any ordered comparison with integers involving equality
|
| 5065 |
|
|
if we can do computations in the relevant mode and we do not
|
| 5066 |
|
|
overflow. */
|
| 5067 |
|
|
|
| 5068 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) != MODE_CC
|
| 5069 |
|
|
&& CONST_INT_P (op1)
|
| 5070 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE (op0) != VOIDmode
|
| 5071 |
|
|
&& GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (op0)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
| 5072 |
|
|
{
|
| 5073 |
|
|
HOST_WIDE_INT const_val = INTVAL (op1);
|
| 5074 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT uconst_val = const_val;
|
| 5075 |
|
|
unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT max_val
|
| 5076 |
|
|
= (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0));
|
| 5077 |
|
|
|
| 5078 |
|
|
switch (code)
|
| 5079 |
|
|
{
|
| 5080 |
|
|
case LE:
|
| 5081 |
|
|
if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_val != max_val >> 1)
|
| 5082 |
|
|
code = LT, op1 = gen_int_mode (const_val + 1, GET_MODE (op0));
|
| 5083 |
|
|
break;
|
| 5084 |
|
|
|
| 5085 |
|
|
/* When cross-compiling, const_val might be sign-extended from
|
| 5086 |
|
|
BITS_PER_WORD to HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT */
|
| 5087 |
|
|
case GE:
|
| 5088 |
|
|
if ((const_val & max_val)
|
| 5089 |
|
|
!= ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
|
| 5090 |
|
|
<< (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (op0)) - 1)))
|
| 5091 |
|
|
code = GT, op1 = gen_int_mode (const_val - 1, GET_MODE (op0));
|
| 5092 |
|
|
break;
|
| 5093 |
|
|
|
| 5094 |
|
|
case LEU:
|
| 5095 |
|
|
if (uconst_val < max_val)
|
| 5096 |
|
|
code = LTU, op1 = gen_int_mode (uconst_val + 1, GET_MODE (op0));
|
| 5097 |
|
|
break;
|
| 5098 |
|
|
|
| 5099 |
|
|
case GEU:
|
| 5100 |
|
|
if (uconst_val != 0)
|
| 5101 |
|
|
code = GTU, op1 = gen_int_mode (uconst_val - 1, GET_MODE (op0));
|
| 5102 |
|
|
break;
|
| 5103 |
|
|
|
| 5104 |
|
|
default:
|
| 5105 |
|
|
break;
|
| 5106 |
|
|
}
|
| 5107 |
|
|
}
|
| 5108 |
|
|
|
| 5109 |
|
|
/* Never return CC0; return zero instead. */
|
| 5110 |
|
|
if (CC0_P (op0))
|
| 5111 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 5112 |
|
|
|
| 5113 |
|
|
return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, VOIDmode, op0, op1);
|
| 5114 |
|
|
}
|
| 5115 |
|
|
|
| 5116 |
|
|
/* Given a jump insn JUMP, return the condition that will cause it to branch
|
| 5117 |
|
|
to its JUMP_LABEL. If the condition cannot be understood, or is an
|
| 5118 |
|
|
inequality floating-point comparison which needs to be reversed, 0 will
|
| 5119 |
|
|
be returned.
|
| 5120 |
|
|
|
| 5121 |
|
|
If EARLIEST is nonzero, it is a pointer to a place where the earliest
|
| 5122 |
|
|
insn used in locating the condition was found. If a replacement test
|
| 5123 |
|
|
of the condition is desired, it should be placed in front of that
|
| 5124 |
|
|
insn and we will be sure that the inputs are still valid. If EARLIEST
|
| 5125 |
|
|
is null, the returned condition will be valid at INSN.
|
| 5126 |
|
|
|
| 5127 |
|
|
If ALLOW_CC_MODE is nonzero, allow the condition returned to be a
|
| 5128 |
|
|
compare CC mode register.
|
| 5129 |
|
|
|
| 5130 |
|
|
VALID_AT_INSN_P is the same as for canonicalize_condition. */
|
| 5131 |
|
|
|
| 5132 |
|
|
rtx
|
| 5133 |
|
|
get_condition (rtx jump, rtx *earliest, int allow_cc_mode, int valid_at_insn_p)
|
| 5134 |
|
|
{
|
| 5135 |
|
|
rtx cond;
|
| 5136 |
|
|
int reverse;
|
| 5137 |
|
|
rtx set;
|
| 5138 |
|
|
|
| 5139 |
|
|
/* If this is not a standard conditional jump, we can't parse it. */
|
| 5140 |
|
|
if (!JUMP_P (jump)
|
| 5141 |
|
|
|| ! any_condjump_p (jump))
|
| 5142 |
|
|
return 0;
|
| 5143 |
|
|
set = pc_set (jump);
|
| 5144 |
|
|
|
| 5145 |
|
|
cond = XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 0);
|
| 5146 |
|
|
|
| 5147 |
|
|
/* If this branches to JUMP_LABEL when the condition is false, reverse
|
| 5148 |
|
|
the condition. */
|
| 5149 |
|
|
reverse
|
| 5150 |
|
|
= GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 2)) == LABEL_REF
|
| 5151 |
|
|
&& XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (set), 2), 0) == JUMP_LABEL (jump);
|
| 5152 |
|
|
|
| 5153 |
|
|
return canonicalize_condition (jump, cond, reverse, earliest, NULL_RTX,
|
| 5154 |
|
|
allow_cc_mode, valid_at_insn_p);
|
| 5155 |
|
|
}
|
| 5156 |
|
|
|
| 5157 |
|
|
/* Initialize the table NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES_IN_REP based on
|
| 5158 |
|
|
TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED.
|
| 5159 |
|
|
|
| 5160 |
|
|
Note that we assume that the property of
|
| 5161 |
|
|
TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED(B, C) is sticky to the integral modes
|
| 5162 |
|
|
narrower than mode B. I.e., if A is a mode narrower than B then in
|
| 5163 |
|
|
order to be able to operate on it in mode B, mode A needs to
|
| 5164 |
|
|
satisfy the requirements set by the representation of mode B. */
|
| 5165 |
|
|
|
| 5166 |
|
|
static void
|
| 5167 |
|
|
init_num_sign_bit_copies_in_rep (void)
|
| 5168 |
|
|
{
|
| 5169 |
|
|
enum machine_mode mode, in_mode;
|
| 5170 |
|
|
|
| 5171 |
|
|
for (in_mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); in_mode != VOIDmode;
|
| 5172 |
|
|
in_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
|
| 5173 |
|
|
for (mode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT); mode != in_mode;
|
| 5174 |
|
|
mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode))
|
| 5175 |
|
|
{
|
| 5176 |
|
|
enum machine_mode i;
|
| 5177 |
|
|
|
| 5178 |
|
|
/* Currently, it is assumed that TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
|
| 5179 |
|
|
extends to the next widest mode. */
|
| 5180 |
|
|
gcc_assert (targetm.mode_rep_extended (mode, in_mode) == UNKNOWN
|
| 5181 |
|
|
|| GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode) == in_mode);
|
| 5182 |
|
|
|
| 5183 |
|
|
/* We are in in_mode. Count how many bits outside of mode
|
| 5184 |
|
|
have to be copies of the sign-bit. */
|
| 5185 |
|
|
for (i = mode; i != in_mode; i = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (i))
|
| 5186 |
|
|
{
|
| 5187 |
|
|
enum machine_mode wider = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (i);
|
| 5188 |
|
|
|
| 5189 |
|
|
if (targetm.mode_rep_extended (i, wider) == SIGN_EXTEND
|
| 5190 |
|
|
/* We can only check sign-bit copies starting from the
|
| 5191 |
|
|
top-bit. In order to be able to check the bits we
|
| 5192 |
|
|
have already seen we pretend that subsequent bits
|
| 5193 |
|
|
have to be sign-bit copies too. */
|
| 5194 |
|
|
|| num_sign_bit_copies_in_rep [in_mode][mode])
|
| 5195 |
|
|
num_sign_bit_copies_in_rep [in_mode][mode]
|
| 5196 |
|
|
+= GET_MODE_PRECISION (wider) - GET_MODE_PRECISION (i);
|
| 5197 |
|
|
}
|
| 5198 |
|
|
}
|
| 5199 |
|
|
}
|
| 5200 |
|
|
|
| 5201 |
|
|
/* Suppose that truncation from the machine mode of X to MODE is not a
|
| 5202 |
|
|
no-op. See if there is anything special about X so that we can
|
| 5203 |
|
|
assume it already contains a truncated value of MODE. */
|
| 5204 |
|
|
|
| 5205 |
|
|
bool
|
| 5206 |
|
|
truncated_to_mode (enum machine_mode mode, const_rtx x)
|
| 5207 |
|
|
{
|
| 5208 |
|
|
/* This register has already been used in MODE without explicit
|
| 5209 |
|
|
truncation. */
|
| 5210 |
|
|
if (REG_P (x) && rtl_hooks.reg_truncated_to_mode (mode, x))
|
| 5211 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 5212 |
|
|
|
| 5213 |
|
|
/* See if we already satisfy the requirements of MODE. If yes we
|
| 5214 |
|
|
can just switch to MODE. */
|
| 5215 |
|
|
if (num_sign_bit_copies_in_rep[GET_MODE (x)][mode]
|
| 5216 |
|
|
&& (num_sign_bit_copies (x, GET_MODE (x))
|
| 5217 |
|
|
>= num_sign_bit_copies_in_rep[GET_MODE (x)][mode] + 1))
|
| 5218 |
|
|
return true;
|
| 5219 |
|
|
|
| 5220 |
|
|
return false;
|
| 5221 |
|
|
}
|
| 5222 |
|
|
|
| 5223 |
|
|
/* Initialize non_rtx_starting_operands, which is used to speed up
|
| 5224 |
|
|
for_each_rtx. */
|
| 5225 |
|
|
void
|
| 5226 |
|
|
init_rtlanal (void)
|
| 5227 |
|
|
{
|
| 5228 |
|
|
int i;
|
| 5229 |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < NUM_RTX_CODE; i++)
|
| 5230 |
|
|
{
|
| 5231 |
|
|
const char *format = GET_RTX_FORMAT (i);
|
| 5232 |
|
|
const char *first = strpbrk (format, "eEV");
|
| 5233 |
|
|
non_rtx_starting_operands[i] = first ? first - format : -1;
|
| 5234 |
|
|
}
|
| 5235 |
|
|
|
| 5236 |
|
|
init_num_sign_bit_copies_in_rep ();
|
| 5237 |
|
|
}
|
| 5238 |
|
|
|
| 5239 |
|
|
/* Check whether this is a constant pool constant. */
|
| 5240 |
|
|
bool
|
| 5241 |
|
|
constant_pool_constant_p (rtx x)
|
| 5242 |
|
|
{
|
| 5243 |
|
|
x = avoid_constant_pool_reference (x);
|
| 5244 |
|
|
return GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE;
|
| 5245 |
|
|
}
|
| 5246 |
|
|
|
| 5247 |
|
|
/* If M is a bitmask that selects a field of low-order bits within an item but
|
| 5248 |
|
|
not the entire word, return the length of the field. Return -1 otherwise.
|
| 5249 |
|
|
M is used in machine mode MODE. */
|
| 5250 |
|
|
|
| 5251 |
|
|
int
|
| 5252 |
|
|
low_bitmask_len (enum machine_mode mode, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT m)
|
| 5253 |
|
|
{
|
| 5254 |
|
|
if (mode != VOIDmode)
|
| 5255 |
|
|
{
|
| 5256 |
|
|
if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
|
| 5257 |
|
|
return -1;
|
| 5258 |
|
|
m &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
|
| 5259 |
|
|
}
|
| 5260 |
|
|
|
| 5261 |
|
|
return exact_log2 (m + 1);
|
| 5262 |
|
|
}
|